JP2023129506A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing eye-catching power of a movable accessory.SOLUTION: A movable plate member 641 includes a plurality of flow-down positions (a right-side guidance part 643 and a left-side guidance part 645) for allowing game balls to flow down, and is configured so as to allow a flow-down mode to differ depending on which flow-down position game balls flow down, thus achieving variations in a mode for guiding game balls to the movable plate member 641, and improving eye-catching power of the movable plate member 641. Flow of game balls flowing down along the movable plate member 641 can be varied, thus improving eye-catching power to the game balls.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is opened based on the detection of a game ball by a detection means, and the movable accessory guides the game ball to a winning hole (Patent Document 1) ).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the attention of the movable accessory. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the attention of movable accessories.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 includes a game ball firing device that fires game balls, and a game area forming means that forms a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball firing device flow down. A gaming machine comprising: a detection means disposed in the gaming area for detecting the passage of a game ball; and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means. The operating means includes a first downstream position where the game ball can flow down, and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, and the operating means has a flow mode in which the game ball flows down the first downstream position. The game ball is configured to flow down the second downstream position in a manner different from that of the game ball.

The gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, in which the flowing manner is a flowing speed, a flowing direction, or a falling interval of the game ball.

In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the first downstream position is set as a position where the gaming ball that has passed through the detection means can flow down.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve the attention of the movable accessory.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve attention to the game balls.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to eliminate the need to visually recognize the detection means.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the route configuration device. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the route configuring device. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the path configuration device taken along line VIIa-VIIa in FIG. 6. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; 3 is a partial front view of the game board in range XII of FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball in a normal winning opening (through gate) and time-measured changes in the state of an electric accessory. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in a 2nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 19(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball by the detection device and time-measured changes in the state of the wing member. It is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 16(a). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit and the throwing ball unit taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23. It is a partial front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partial front view of the game board in 4th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 14, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is configured by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral part thereof is the inner frame 12. (See Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

Note that the structure of the base plate 60 is not limited to resin material. For example, the base board 60 may be made of wood made of thin plates pasted together, and may be formed so that the various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base board 60 cannot be visually seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a region in which prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

Note that the above-mentioned gaming area is interpreted in a narrow sense, and in a broader sense, the gaming area may be expressed as the area where the gaming ball falls until the profit given to the player by the falling gaming ball is determined. In this sense, the gaming area is not limited to the area on the front side of the gaming board 13. For example, a route arranged upstream of sensor SE, which will be described later, is also included in the game area.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

The lottery based on winnings will be explained in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, winnings are made to the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 (some kind of benefit to the player (for example, paying out prize balls, executing a lottery, moving to a more advantageous state) A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when there is a ball that can be expected to be awarded a profit, etc.), and the ball is drawn into the regular prize openings 66, 67 (or the regular prize openings (through gate) described later). )765), a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery conducted for balls entering the first prize opening 64 and the second prize opening 640, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the type of jackpot is also determined.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the special symbol's high probability state (also referred to as the special symbol's probability variable state), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, a special symbol lottery that is performed when a game ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is detected by a sensor SE, which will be described later, will be referred to as a "special symbol 1 lottery", and the second winning hole 640 A special symbol lottery that is performed when a game ball that has entered the game ball is detected by a sensor (not shown) on the downstream side is referred to as a "special symbol 2 lottery."

When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the special prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, opens for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls (the specified number) ) The opening action will be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds) until a prize is won. As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out. It should be noted that the fact that prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and the number of prize balls to be paid out will be described later.

There are six special symbol jackpot types: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c". Although details will be described later, the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a after the end of the special game are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating this will be stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 while a variable display is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls entering the ball will be up to 4 for each type of winning hole. The number of balls reserved is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning hole 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2) If the number of reserved balls remains, the next special symbol is drawn, and a variable display corresponding to the drawing is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both remain, a lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is executed preferentially.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is configured to be executed preferentially. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery may be executed preferentially in the order in which the special symbols are obtained (in the order in which the balls are entered), or the lottery may be executed alternately between the special symbols 1 and 2. Alternatively, the lottery may be executed using the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 at the same time.

In the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. become. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball becomes easier to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol.

Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or 1 second) has elapsed. Afterwards, a normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal winning hole 66, 67, 765 while the variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes will be suspended up to 4 times, and the number of suspended balls will be displayed on the first symbol display. It is displayed by the device 37 and is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal winning slots 66, 67, 765, the next normal symbol lottery will be held, and the lottery according to the lottery will be held. Fluctuation display starts.

In this embodiment, as an added value after a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability changing) from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. (For example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a, jackpot b described later), and after the jackpot game, the time saving state of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times (for example, as described later) Jackpot C, jackpot c) are available.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special symbol is given a variable probability state after the end of the special gaming state, a case has been described in which the variable probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot. For example, the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state until the 100th special symbol lottery is completed, and the special symbol is given a variable probability state (high probability state) after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. After that, the normal state may be set.

It should be noted that the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the probability variable state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the above-mentioned normal symbol becomes the time-saving state is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a state in which the probability is changing (probability changing).In other words, it is a state where the probability of a jackpot is changing (probability changing). This is a gaming state that is easy to transition to. In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability of the special symbol is changing) includes a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change, but the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of special symbols" refers to a time when the probability of special symbols is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than when the probability of special symbols is changing.

In addition, the "time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving)" refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbols does not change, but it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. In addition, the "normal state" refers to the state of the game where the probability of special symbols is not changing or the time of normal symbols is shortening (the jackpot probability and the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbol) have not changed, and the second prize opening 640 is not changed). This refers to a state in which the ball is not easy to land.

During the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal state. When the electric accessory 640a is in an excited state (excited state, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is placed at the front position and enters the first ball throwing path KR1), the electric accessory 640a is de-energized. The ball enters the second prize opening 640 compared to the case where it is in a retracted state (non-excited state, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is arranged at the rear position and retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1). becomes easier to win. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. That is, it becomes easier to draw special symbols.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is a hit may be increased compared to the normal state.

In addition, during the probability change of special symbols and the time saving of normal symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened, and the electric At least one of the opening times of the accessory 640a may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened will not be changed, and the normal symbol (the 2 symbols) may be configured to increase only the winning probability compared to the normal state.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

If a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. The number of balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of winning hole, and the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, the sensor SE disposed downstream of the first winning hole 64 and the ball entering the second winning hole 640 are configured to be suspended up to four times each. The number of suspensions is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to a winning in either the sensor SE arranged downstream of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 4R normal jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "8R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after .

In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). Yes, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of

"Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a changes while the jackpot probability remains the same (or the second symbol This refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 (increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol). On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is not changing in probability or shortening the game time (in a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the ease of winning a prize in the second prize opening 640 has been increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area.

The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and a second symbol is displayed using the passage of the ball in the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED that variably displays the number of game balls, and a second symbol retention lamp 84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game balls have passed through the normal winning openings 66 and 67 by the lighting state. It is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this.

The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (the same main symbol A fluctuating display that finally stops when all the characters are aligned is performed, and after the fluctuating display ends, a jackpot occurs (transition to a special gaming state begins). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up (a variable display that finally stops in a state where they do not line up) is performed.

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a guaranteed variable jackpot, the main symbol with any number added from all the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers is A matching fluctuating display is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, the display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to hit the ball toward the right path (channel) of the game board 13 will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, the game ball is more easily guided by the electric accessory 640a, so the game ball is easily guided by the electric accessory 640a. By launching the ball to the right side of the board 13 (hitting the ball to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) that is performed based on a ball entering the second prize hole 640, the ball will be entered into the first prize hole 64. Compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved by a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) based on the ball entering the ball, it is more likely to be a jackpot that allows you to obtain the maximum number of prize balls (jackpot a, b, c). .

Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols awarded after the end of the jackpot or the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right hit. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the variable probability state or the normal symbol is set to the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to enter the second winning hole 640 unless the player hits the ball with the right hand. The player will not be able to fully benefit from the variable probability state and the time-saving state of normal symbols.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right hit navigation) in the variable probability state of special symbols or the time saving state of normal symbols, the player can The structure is designed to ensure that the benefits of this will be obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the text "Aim to the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the text. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably obtain benefits due to the variable probability state of the special symbols and the shortened time state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. This warning image indicates that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (hitting the ball to the right). This is an image (a right-handed warning image) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player is hit. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in a normal state (a state that is neither a special symbol probability changing state nor a normal symbol time saving state).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to make it difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in the normal state (even if you hit right, the ball will not be guided to the second winning hole 640). (difficult to ball). For this reason, if you hit the ball right-handed in the normal state, you will have fewer chances to receive a special symbol lottery than if you hit the ball left-handed and aim at the first prize opening 64. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it becomes difficult to hit the jackpot, resulting in a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed hitting warning image and encouraging left-handed hitting, the player is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from making a loss.

If it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the third symbol display device 81 will display the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" The characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not play right-handed (he should play left-handed). Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed hitting warning screen, the clerk at the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is playing an irregular game method of playing right-handed in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as a method for determining whether or not the player is hitting right-handed, the ball enters a normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can enter if the ball is hitting right-handed. Judging by whether or not it was done.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball enters the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed hit warning image is displayed. It is not limited to. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), if it is detected that a ball has won (ball entered) into the specific winning hole 65a, an illegal game (not limited to a right-handed game), for example, a variable winning device It may be configured to determine that a game mode (including a game mode in which a game ball is forced into the game ball by applying a load to the game ball 65 to open the specific prize opening 65a and forcing the game ball to enter the game ball) is being performed, and a right-handed hitting warning image is displayed. . As a result, the clerk at the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed player warning image.

For example, when it is detected that a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), a signal indicating that fraud is being committed is sent to the hall computer. It may also be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that fraud is being committed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud is being committed.

Further, for example, by narrowing the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80, a range through which the game balls are forced to pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game balls is arranged in this range. You can do it like this. In this case, based on the fact that the detection sensor detects the passing of the game ball, it can be determined that the ball is being hit to the right.

Furthermore, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) disposed to the left of the top position of the variable display unit 80 (corresponding to the left-right center position in FIG. 2) may be provided. good. In this case, when the game ball is being launched, it can be determined that the game ball is being hit to the right based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device 65 will be explained. Here, an example of an abnormality in the variable winning device 65 is a case where a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is detected even though it is not in a special gaming state (jackpot state).

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device 65, the word "warning" is displayed in large letters in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the words "Please call the gate error staff" are displayed at the bottom of the screen. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can quickly request a repair or the like from a parlor clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 predetermines the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbols) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. This is a variable display that lights up alternately over time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is moved to a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for only a certain amount of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that it is shorter when the probability of the special symbol is changing or when the time of the normal symbol is shortened than when the gaming state is in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so it is possible to draw the regular symbol (second symbol) more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, so the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 in the open state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can be entered into the second prize opening 640 by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a. When the state is such that it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or the normal symbol's time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will be constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

Normal prize openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80, and allow some of the balls that flow down the game board, among the balls fired at the game board, to pass through. It is composed of In addition, the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 is arranged to be able to detect game balls flowing down the internal flow path of the path configuration device 700.

When the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 is held up to a maximum of 4 times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B mentioned above, and the second The symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. This may be performed using a part of the 3-symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). ) may be set. Further, the number of ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 arranged on the base plate 60 is not limited to two, and may be one, or other plurality (for example, three or more). It may be.

In addition, the installation positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, for example, they may be installed on either the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or the variable display It may be above or below the device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, the sensor SE as the first winning port switch provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, the sensor SE as the first winning hole switch or the second winning hole switch (so that the falling balls do not pass continuously) It also serves as one of the winning holes (prize ball hole) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls based on each switch (disposed) being turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five. Further, the magnitude relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be slidable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state (retracted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. , the electric accessory 640a will be in an excited state (entering state), and the ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the normal symbol's variable display is also shorter, so the normal symbol The "○" symbol may be displayed more easily in the variable display. That is, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened may also be made longer than during the normal state.

During the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, a state can be created in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 compared to the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like that provided in the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, a, b, c) that provides the maximum profit (number of prize balls in the special gaming state) as the jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is the second winning slot. The winning amount is set higher when the ball enters the winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a de-energized state (retracted state), and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640. A ball is fired toward the first prize opening 64 so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning a prize in the first prize opening 64, there is an opportunity for a jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim to win more and win the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is changing or the time is shortening of normal symbols, by passing the ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in an excited state. (entering state), and it is easy to win a prize in the second prize opening 640. Therefore, the ball should be directed toward the side where the electric accessory 640a is arranged so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80. (so-called "right shot"), pass through the normal prize opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a, and aim to win a jackpot by entering the second prize opening 640. This is more advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery performed due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the jackpot is announced after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the symbol is stopped. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (specified number) are won).

This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (gaming value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on one ball winning a prize.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing plate to open and close in the front and back direction. There is. Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to retract the opening/closing plate to the rear, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and distinguishing between the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by repeating the following states alternately.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the lower side of the first winning hole 64, for example. , the left and right sides or the upper side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The overall configuration of route configuration device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the route configuring device 700, FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the route configuring device 700, and FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b) are VIIa- FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the path configuration device 700 along line VIIa.

In FIG. 6, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the outer shape of the collection hole 752 are illustrated with broken lines. Further, FIG. 7(a) shows a retracted state in which the electric accessory 640a is retracted from the first ball throwing route KR1, which will be described later, and FIG. 7(b) shows the electric accessory 640a moving toward the first ball throwing route KR1. The approach state being entered is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the path configuration device 700 includes a front side forming part 710 that is disposed below the center frame 86 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60; A back side forming part 720 disposed on the back side with respect to the front side.

The front side forming part 710 is formed mainly including a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and bending members 740 arranged on the front side on both left and right sides of the winning member 730. Ru.

The back side forming part 720 includes an intervening member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the intervening member 750, and a solenoid 640s on the intervening member 750. It is formed mainly by a fixedly arranged electric accessory 640a.

The winning member 730 includes a cover plate part 711 which is disposed on the front surface of the base plate 60 and is thinly formed in a shape that covers the through hole 60a and is attached to the base plate 60, and a cover plate part 711 located at the left and right center position of the cover plate part 711. an upper ball passage hole 713 that is bored in the front-rear direction, a lower ball passage hole 714 that is arranged below the upper ball passage hole 713 and is drilled in the front-rear direction, and a left-right direction of the covered plate part 711. A first winning hole 64 located at the upper center, a second winning hole 640 located below the first winning hole 64 (below the lower ball passing hole 714), and a second winning hole 640 located on both sides in the left and right direction. A through hole 731 is formed to penetrate through the hole 731, a lower insertion hole 732 is located below the through hole 731 and is formed to penetrate in the front and back direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 is formed to penetrate in the front and back direction on the left side of the lower insertion hole 732 on the right side. a first ball throwing section 734 having a ball passage hole 734a, a through hole 735 formed to penetrate in the front and back direction as a long hole extending from the right end of the lower edge of the first ball throwing section 734 in the upper right direction; A second ball throwing part 736 has a ball passing hole 736a formed to penetrate in the front-back direction on the right side of the lower insertion hole 732, and a second ball throwing part 736 is formed laterally symmetrically with the first ball throwing part 734 with the upper ball passing hole 713 as a reference. A third ball throwing section 737 is formed.

The through hole 731 is a member into which an upper protrusion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front and opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protrusion 741 when viewed from the rear. .

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750 disposed on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape when viewed from the front, with a curved lower surface side.

A sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is provided on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member that is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a through hole formed in its side surface with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. The passage of can be detected. The sensor SE is arranged such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thereby, the opening direction of the through hole can be made to be inclined slightly downward toward the back side, so that it is possible to suppress the ball passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE from staying inside the through hole.

The first ball sending part 734 includes a ball passing hole 734a disposed at a position communicating with the upstream end of the first inclined groove 755 of the intervening member 750, and a U-shaped ball passing hole 734a in a front view. A protruding edge 734b whose edge protrudes toward the front side, a downstream portion of the protruding edge 734b protruding toward the ball path side, and a tip of the protruding edge slanting toward the back side. A downstream ball throwing section 734c is provided that is capable of throwing a ball flowing down from the ball to the back side.

The through hole 735 is formed in a shape that allows the movable plate member 641 to be inserted in the front-back direction. That is, it is formed in a shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the right guide part 643 and the left guide part 645 of the movable plate member 641 and the connecting part that connects them when viewed from the front.

As a result, when the movable plate member 641 is in the retracted state, the front end of the movable plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735, and when the movable plate member 641 is in the advanced state, the rear end side of the movable plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735. By doing so, the arrangement of the movable plate member 641 can be stabilized.

The second ball sending portion 736 includes a ball passing hole 736a disposed at a position communicating with the upstream end of the second inclined groove 757 of the intervening member 750, and a U-shaped ball passing hole 736a in a front view. A protruding edge 736b whose edge protrudes toward the front side, a downstream portion of the protruding edge 736b protruding toward the ball path side, and a tip of the protruding portion having a shape that slopes toward the back side. A downstream ball throwing section 736c is provided that is capable of throwing a ball flowing down from the ball to the back side.

While the third ball throwing section 737 is formed laterally symmetrically with the first ball throwing section 734, it is not configured so that the game ball is guided by the electric accessory 640a. It has a shape that allows balls to enter from the left side, making it possible to reduce the frequency of balls entering the ball. The third ball throwing section 737 has the same function as the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). That is, when a ball enters, 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that since balls rarely enter the third ball throwing section 737, the number of prize balls is set at the maximum (15 balls) in order to maximize the player's profit in the event that a ball enters the third ball throwing section 737.

The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is located at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. Two of them are arranged symmetrically, and their external shapes are formed to be approximately left and right symmetrical.

Further, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area when viewed from the front. This prevents the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 from being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and remaining in the game area.

The bending member 740 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 that protrudes from the back surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. and an opening 744 formed between the opposing lower protrusions 743.

The upper protrusion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom when viewed from the rear, and its outer shape is set to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Thereby, when placing the bending member 740 on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731. Therefore, when placing the bending member 740 on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and positioned, thereby simplifying the assembly process.

The lower protrusion 743 is formed below the upper protrusion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in rear view with an open upper side. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protrusion 743 provides a path (hereinafter referred to as "second ball throwing path KR2") for throwing the ball from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. This is a member for forming the lower insertion hole 732 and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 toward the back side is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 with the protruding end surface of the lower protruding portion 743 in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and a ball throwing path (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "first ball throwing route KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743 . The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U-shape with an open back side when viewed from the side.

The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that vertically throws the ball from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball throwing path KR1) and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The height of the lower inner edge in the vertical direction is slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 disposed on the back surface.

The guide portion 742 is formed along the left-right center line of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side when viewed from the front. As a result, the ball comes into contact with the guide portion 742 and is guided (folded back to the back side), so that the ball can be easily displaced in the left-right direction.

The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U-shape with the rear side open when viewed from the side.

The height of the upper end of the rear side end of the opening 744 is set to be approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the front end side of the guide portion 742 at the same front-back position, and the height of the lower end of the rear side end is set to be approximately the same as the front end side of the guide portion 742 at the same front-back position. , is set at approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 of the movable plate member 641. The opening 744 is formed to open on the side surface in the left and right direction of the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

The distribution member 760 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a box-like body with an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left and right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that are inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction in a front view toward both left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 disposed at the center of each inclined surface 761, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. A ball sending opening 763 formed in the top, a regulating wall part 764 for regulating the rotation of the seesaw member 762, and a normal winning opening (through hole) disposed at a position where the ball guided to the right inclined surface 761 can pass through. gate) 765.

The pair of inclined surfaces 761 are inclined surfaces extending in opposite left and right directions, and are formed so that the inclination angles with respect to the horizontal plane are bilaterally symmetrical. In this embodiment, a region with a slightly steep inclination angle is provided on the upstream side, and a region with a gentle inclination angle on the downstream side is formed at an inclination angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane.

The ball sending port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning port 64 of the winning member 730. Thereby, when the distribution member 760 is disposed on the intervening member 750 described later, a space can be formed between the ball throwing port 763 and the intervening member 750 facing each other.

The space is formed into a space larger than the outer diameter of the ball (that is, a space through which the ball can pass), and the first winning opening of the winning member 730 is formed through a through hole 60b drilled in the base plate 60. 64 internal spaces. Thereby, the ball won in the first winning opening 64 can be thrown into the space between the facing ball opening 763 and the intervening member 750, and the ball can be thrown inside the space.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inner side of the annular ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is held between the intervening member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for distributing the balls alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761, one by one, when the ball is thrown from the space between the above-described opposing ball opening 763 and the intervening member 750. The ball is thrown to the side opposite to the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a is located. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes displaces the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a at the center is located (rotating the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is regulated by the contact between the distal end surface of the protrusion 762a and the regulating wall 764.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the projection 762a at the center of the projection 762a that is not in contact with the regulating wall portion 764, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the regulating wall portion 764, thereby regulating its displacement.

The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of the path on which the balls distributed left and right by the seesaw member 762 described above roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as "third ball throwing path KR3"), and is a rolling surface of the distribution member 760. It is formed to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are thrown (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined toward the intervening member 750 such that the back side surface becomes thicker forward toward the end. Thereby, the ball that has rolled on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end thereof can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the intervening member 750 disposed in front of the distribution member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged between the intervening member 750 and the distributing member 760, and is fixedly arranged inside by connecting and fixing the intervening member 750 and the distributing member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged so that the inner surface of the ball passage hole of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the side along the slope 761 are in the same position as the top surface of the slope 761. The arrangement of is designed.

As a result, when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the resistance given to the ball can be minimized, and the slope on the right side where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged. It is possible to equalize the speed of the ball flowing down the ball 761 and the ball flowing down the left inclined surface 761 where the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 is not provided.

The function of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is common to the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 and 67 described above. That is, the normal winning a prize opening (through gate) 765 has a function as a detection opening where a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn by lottery when a ball passes through.

In addition, when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67 is The ball is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). ) may be set.

The second symbol display device 83 predetermines the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbols) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. This is a variable display that lights up alternately over time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, the next normal symbol lottery will be held, and the next normal symbol will be drawn. A variable display according to the lottery starts.

The intervening member 750 is a member interposed between the front and back of the bending member 740 and the distribution member 760, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. 65, a communication hole 751 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, a recovery hole 752 that opens on the lower side of the communication hole 751, and a long left and right hole in the front-rear direction between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752. A support recess 753 formed through the support recess 753, a linear first inclined groove 755 that slopes downward toward the left side in front view with the left and right center position as the downstream end, and a right and left center below the first inclined groove 755. It mainly includes a linear second inclined groove 757 that slopes downward toward the left side when viewed from the front with the downstream end position as the downstream end, and a second recovery hole 758 that is disposed below the second inclined groove 757. It is formed.

The communication hole 751 is formed on the front side of both left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and is also formed on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 mentioned above passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth ball throwing path KR4"). ) can be formed.

As described above, the recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is thrown into the opening of the collection hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device for circulating balls installed in the store, and the balls collected in the collection hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out from the ball firing unit 112a again as game balls. .

The support recess 753 is a recess groove formed to ensure sufficient space for the right side guide portion 643 of the movable plate member 641 to move in the front-rear direction. The lower bottom surface of the support recess 753, which faces the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape that is horizontal in the left-right direction. Further, the upper surface of the support recessed portion 753, which faces the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape with an inclination angle similar to that of the inclined surface 643a.

That is, the support recess 753 is recessed from the left side to the right side, and is formed in a wedge shape that is wide on the left side and narrow on the right side.Functionally, the support recess 753 has a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width of the right guide part 643 when viewed from the front. (slightly larger wedge shape).

As a result, when using the movable plate member 641, when sliding it in the front-back direction, the right guide part 643 is guided inside the support recess 753, so the movement can be smoothly executed, and the right When the guide portion 643 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 and receives a ball flowing down, the right guide portion 643 can be supported by the lower bottom surface of the support recess 753. That is, the support recess 753 has the effect of smoothing the movement of the movable plate member 641 and the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the movable plate member 641.

The first inclined groove 755 is disposed at a position where the upstream end communicates with the ball passing hole 734a, and the ball that has reached the downstream end is sent to the front side through the upper ball passing hole 713 of the front side forming part 710. Consists of possible shapes.

The second inclined groove 757 is disposed at a position where the upstream end communicates with the ball passing hole 736a, and allows the ball that has reached the downstream end to pass through the lower ball passing hole 714 of the front side forming part 710 to the front side. Constructed in a shape that allows for ball throwing.

In this embodiment, the first slanted groove 755 and the second slanted groove 757 are formed in a linear groove shape, and the straight lines along which the respective grooves follow are parallel to each other.

The second collection hole 758 is an opening through which the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is thrown, and is arranged upstream of the second winning opening switch (not shown). The second collection hole 758 is connected to a ball circulating device installed in the store, and the balls collected in the second collection hole 758 are circulated by the circulation device and returned as game balls from the ball firing unit 112a. It is launched.

The upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 are arranged on a straight line along the vertical direction, and the second prize opening 640 is arranged below the lower ball passing hole 714 on the same straight line ( (See Figure 6).

Therefore, the ball thrown to the front side through the upper ball passage hole 713 passes through the front side of the lower ball passage hole 714 and enters the second winning hole 640. Further, the ball thrown to the front side through the lower ball passage hole 714 merges with the flow path of the ball thrown to the front side from the upper ball passage hole 713, and enters the second winning hole 640.

At the confluence position of the downward flow paths of the balls, the downward direction of the balls flowing down from the upper ball passage hole 713 is in the vertical direction, and the falling speed at the confluence position can be increased. Even if the balls guided from the ball passage hole 714 arrive at the merging position at the same time, the balls flowing down from the upper ball passage hole 713 can be passed downward with momentum, making it easy to avoid clogging of the balls.

Moreover, the wall portions 714a extending from the left and right edges of the lower ball passage hole 714 toward the front side can easily prevent the balls from deviating from the merging position to the left and right. Moreover, the wall portion 714a also acts to prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 from the left and right outer sides.

The wall portion 713a extending from the left and right edges and the upper edge of the upper ball passage hole 713 toward the front side prevents the ball from being thrown from the upper ball passage hole 713 toward the front side to the front side of the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent balls flowing down the side from colliding with each other. Moreover, the wall portion 713a also acts to prevent the balls that have flowed down the front side of the base plate 60 from flowing down toward the second winning opening 640 side.

The electric accessory 640a includes a solenoid 640s that is fixedly arranged on the intervening member 750, and a movable plate member 641 that is operatively connected to the solenoid 640s and slides in the front and rear directions when driven by the solenoid 640s.

The movable plate member 641 includes a transmission plate part 642 that is a plate-shaped part to which the driving force of the solenoid 640s is transmitted and extends in the vertical direction, and a transmission plate part 642 that is disposed at the front end of the transmission plate part 642. A left guide portion 645 is formed to protrude from the left side guide portion 645, and a right side guide portion 643 is provided to extend to the right of the left side guide portion 645.

The right guide portion 643 is formed as an inclined surface 643a whose upper surface, which is a rolling surface of the ball, is inclined downward toward the right side, and is disposed between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 when viewed from the front.

The left guide part 645 is formed as an inclined surface 645a whose upper surface, which becomes a rolling surface of the ball, slopes downward toward the left side, and is arranged so as to connect the bending member 740 and the first ball sending part 734 when viewed from the front. Ru. The upper surface of the downstream end of the inclined surface 645a is arranged to be flush with the upper surface of the lower end of the protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734.

The protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734 is not in the shape of a saucer that is open upwards, but the open side is oriented toward the right side and has a lid on the top, so that the ball rolls on the left guide section 645. While smoothly receiving the ball, the ball that bounces off the left guide section 645 and the ball that flows down through a path that reaches the first ball throwing section 734 from above are prevented from jumping into the ball passing hole 734a. It is possible to make it less likely to occur. Note that the protruding lid portion 734b may be formed into a dish shape to allow a ball to fly in from above.

Note that even if the ball lands on the left guide section 645, it is difficult to enter the first ball throwing section 734 until the ball bounces off. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that reduces bounce on the left guide portion 645.

For example, by densely arranging nails that can collide with the balls above the left guide part 645, or by arranging a plurality of deceleration convex parts protruding from the front side of the cover plate part 711, the flow of the balls can be reduced. The momentum may be reduced in advance. Alternatively, a sheet member with high cushioning properties may be attached to the inclined surface 645a to suppress the ball from bouncing.

In the de-energized state where the solenoid 640s is de-energized, the movable plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it retracts from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(a)), and in the energized state of the solenoid 640s (where driving force is generated). In this state, the ball enters the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)).

A game ball is thrown in the following manner by the path configuring device 700 configured as described above. The ball that enters from the first prize opening 64 is thrown to the distribution member 760, and is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. When the ball thrown along the third ball throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third ball throwing path KR3, it enters the fourth ball throwing path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the intervening member 750 disposed on the front side. The ball is thrown. The ball thrown along the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. A ball thrown along the first ball throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. The ball thrown along the second ball throwing route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, is thrown into the collection hole 752 of the intervening member 750, and passes through the inside of the sensor SE.

The ball thrown from the fourth ball throwing path KR4 to the first ball throwing path KR1 flows down toward the front side of the base plate 60, and the ball appears to be approaching the player in the player's line of sight. appear. This clarifies the difference in the falling manner from other game balls flowing downward in the gaming area, so it is possible to increase the presence of the ball thrown from the fourth ball throwing route KR4 to the first ball throwing route KR1. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, setting of the downward flow mode of the sphere will be explained. 8(a), FIG. 8(b), FIG. 9(a), and FIG. 9(b) are partial front views of the route configuring device 700 in range VIIIa of FIG. 6.

In FIG. 8(a), FIG. 8(b), FIG. 9(a), and FIG. 9(b), when three balls P1 to P3 enter the first winning hole 64 consecutively without any interval, The flow pattern in is illustrated in a time series at 0.5 second intervals.

That is, FIG. 8(b) is illustrated as a state 0.5 seconds after the state in FIG. 8(a), and FIG. 9(a) is illustrated as a state 0.5 seconds after the state in FIG. 8(b). FIG. 9(b) shows the state 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 9(a). As an example, FIG. 8A shows a state in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a faces leftward.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the ball P1 is guided by the projection 762a at the center, the guided ball P1 collides with one of the projections 762a at both ends and is pushed down. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the regulating wall 764, thereby regulating its displacement (see FIG. 8(b)).

In this state, the ball P1 that has pushed down the seesaw member 762 is flowing down toward the right, and at the same time, the next ball P2 is guided by the central projection 762a. At this time, at the same time as the ball P2 reaches the central protrusion 762a, the ball P1 that has pushed down the seesaw member 762 first passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 (see FIG. 8(b)).

The ball P2 is flown down to the left by the seesaw member 762, and at the same time, the next ball P3 is guided to the central projection 762a. At this time, at the same time as the ball P3 reaches the central protrusion 762a, the ball P1 is placed below the right guide portion 643 (see FIG. 9(a)). Thereafter, the ball P3 is flown down to the right by the seesaw member 762 (see FIG. 9(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is defined in relation to the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a. That is, after the ball P1 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and before it is placed below the right guide part 643, the next ball P3 reaches the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. It is designed not to.

Here, when the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed based on a preset operation pattern. The operation of the electric accessory 640a is not interrupted in the middle of the operation pattern. Even if the passage of a ball is detected in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 while the operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the operation pattern is continued, the execution of the operation of the electric accessory 640a due to the detection is The operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the currently executed operation pattern is suspended until the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed.

Therefore, even if the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that it can influence the ball that has passed through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 based on the ball's falling time, the operation of the electric accessory 640a cannot be executed. If a situation where the ball is held up occurs, there is a possibility that the influence on the ball that has passed through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 will be unexpected.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set according to the time span until the ball reaches the right guide part 643, the next ball P3 enters the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric accessory 640a continues to operate due to the detection of the previous ball P1 in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until the ball P1 is detected in the through gate. (The operation of object 640a ends).

Therefore, when the passage of a ball is detected at the normal winning gate (through gate) 765, the electric accessory 640a immediately operates based on the preset operation pattern without suspending the execution of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. The following actions can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 will be unexpected.

10(a), FIG. 10(b), FIG. 11(a), and FIG. 11(b) are partial front views of the route construction device 700 in range VIIIa of FIG. 6. FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) and FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b) illustrate different examples of how the ball flows down the right slope 761 in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 10(a), a state in which the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is illustrated, and in FIG. 10(b), when the ball passes, the movable plate member 641 moves to the first ball throwing path KR1. A state in which the ball is maintained in a retracted state (see FIG. 7(a)) and guided to the collection hole 752 is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 11(a), a state in which the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (same state as in FIG. 10(a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)) and the ball is guided toward the second ball throwing section 736 is illustrated.

Note that the dots drawn on the movable plate member 641 in FIG. 11(b) indicate that the movable plate member 641 is sliding toward the front side and does not allow the ball to pass through the front side. is schematically shown.

Here, in the de-energized state in which the solenoid 640s is de-energized, the movable plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it retracts from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(a)), and in the energized state (driving In the state in which a force is generated, the ball enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)). The ball passes through the front side of the movable plate member 641 and flows downward, while in the excited state, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 in the front view falls on the inclined surface 643a or the inclined surface 645a of the movable plate member 641. It rolls down and flows left and right.

For example, it flows down along the arrow shown in FIG. 11(b). Specifically, when the movable plate member 641 is in an excited state, the ball that has reached the first ball throwing path KR1 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 643a, passes through the opening 744, falls, and is received by the second ball throwing section 736. It will be done.

In addition, when the movable plate member 641 is in the excited state, a ball that is about to flow down between the right bending member 740 and the first ball sending part 734 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 645a and is guided to the ball passing hole 734a. , the ball will enter the second winning hole 640.

FIG. 12 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in range XII of FIG. In FIG. 12, the solenoid 640s is energized and the movable plate member 641 is shown in an advanced state.

As mentioned above, the functions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 are common, so the ball that enters the path configuring device 700 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Not limited to this case, when playing the above-mentioned right-handed game, the electric accessory 640a is activated even when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67.

In this case, more game balls fired in a right-handed game reach the ceiling surface of the right bending member 740 than the balls guided to the first prize opening 64 (approximately 10 times as many balls). ), in the advanced state of the movable plate member 641, the ball can more easily reach the left guide part 645 than the right guide part 643 of the electric accessory 640a.

If the solenoid 640s is maintained in an excited state until the ball reaches the left guide part 645, it flows down and reaches the first ball throwing part 734, the ball will enter the second prize opening 640, and the first ball will enter the second prize opening 640. Even if the solenoid 640s is switched to the de-energized state before reaching the ball sending section 734, the ball will simply flow downward and will not be guided to the recovery hole 752. In other words, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special symbol 1 is won by the ball reaching the left guide portion 645.

A ball that reaches the left guide section 645 in the entering state is received by the first ball throwing section 734 in about 1.0 seconds, regardless of the landing position. On the other hand, if the movable plate member 641 changes to the retracted state in a very short time such as 0.5 seconds, even if the ball lands near the left end of the left guide section 645 in the approach state, the first There is a possibility that the ball entering the ball throwing section 734 may be obstructed.

Therefore, the ball flowing down without entering the first prize opening 64 is operated as a result of a lottery by ball detection at the normal prize opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 and enters the left side guide part. 645 in a timely manner, whether or not the ball is received by the first ball throwing section 734 depends on the operating mode of the electric accessories 640a.

In particular, in the operating pattern in the normal state (the fourth operating pattern described later), the period during which the movable plate member 641 is in the advancing state is shorter than 0.5 seconds, so the ball is received into the first ball throwing section 734. The probability is extremely low.

If the movable plate member 641 is in the entering state at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, it will be guided by the right guide section 643 and finally reach the second winning hole 640. Since the ball enters the ball, it does not pass through the sensor SE (see FIG. 7(b)), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the lottery of special symbol 1 is obtained. On the other hand, if the movable plate member 641 is in the retracted state at the timing when the ball reaches the first ball throwing route KR1, the ball is guided to the second ball throwing route KR2 and passes through the sensor SE, so that the special symbol 1 lottery is obtained. I will do it.

In this way, according to the electric accessory 640a of the present embodiment, the ball flows down a path that can reach the right guide section 643 (the path after the ball enters the first prize opening 64), or the ball flows down the path that can reach the right guide section 643 Depending on whether the ball falls along a route that can reach , the possibility of acquiring the special symbol 1 lottery (possibility of acquiring the special symbol 2 lottery) can be changed by the ball.

In addition, as mentioned above, the balls arrive at the right guide section 643 at intervals, but the balls arrive at the left guide section 645 at intervals due to the action of the seesaw member 762, so it is normal to win a prize. A plurality of balls flowing down the mouth (through gate) 67 side can arrive at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable that the left guide portion 645 be made stronger than the right guide portion 643.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the left guide portion 645 is disposed on the transmission plate portion 642 (see FIG. 5). That is, by disposing the left guide portion 645 on the transmission plate portion 642 that is closer to the solenoid 640s (upstream side of the driving force transmission path), changes in the posture of the left guide portion 645 are suppressed. This prevents the left guide part 645 from changing its posture excessively and increasing the operating resistance of the movable plate member 641 even when weight is applied to the left guide part 645 by a plurality of balls riding on it. be able to.

Note that the means for forming the left guide portion 645 to be strong is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, the left guide portion 645 may be thicker than the right guide portion 643, or a rib may be formed to connect the lower portion of the left guide portion 645 and the transmission plate portion 642.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be explained with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 13(b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 13(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, the game state after executing 15 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the first operation pattern described later. The condition continues until the next jackpot is won.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 49", and the jackpot B is defined in association with it (see 202b2 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot B, the gaming state after executing 8 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern described later. The condition continues until the next jackpot is won.

A jackpot C is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot C, the gaming state after executing the 4-round jackpot game (special game) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern described later. This state continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), there is a 20% probability of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% probability of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you cannot expect a large amount of prize balls. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 640) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b4 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, the game state after executing 15 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is set to be a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the high probability state, as in the case of jackpot A. The state set in operation pattern 1 continues until the next jackpot is won.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 49" is associated with and defined as a jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot b, the game state after executing 15 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the first operation pattern described later. The condition continues until the next jackpot is won.

A jackpot c is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot c, the game state after executing the 15 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the third operation pattern described later. This state continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640), it is possible to play the jackpot game for 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot game ends. The distribution of the operation pattern of the subsequent electric accessory 640a is set to be different from the case where a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery. The difference is particularly noticeable in the case of jackpot c, but the details will be described later.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 13(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 13(c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 13(c)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, and the second winning random number table 202c. , it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIGS. 14(a) to 14(d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and time-measured changes in the state of the electric accessory 640a. Note that FIG. 14(a) shows the time measurement change in the first operation pattern, FIG. 14(b) shows the time measurement change in the second operation pattern, and FIG. 14(c) shows the time measurement change in the third operation pattern. A timed change in the actuation pattern is illustrated, and in FIG. 14(d) a timed change in the fourth actuation pattern is illustrated.

Note that the fourth operation pattern is an operation pattern that is adopted during normal play or after the special symbol lottery has been completed 100 times after the end of jackpots C and c (see FIG. 13(b)).

In FIGS. 14(a) to 14(d), the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner when the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (in this embodiment, after about 0.1 seconds) ), when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, each operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the time when the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Of these, the meaning of the state of the electric accessory 640a during the reference time Td1 (approximately 0.5 seconds in this embodiment) after the passage of the ball is detected in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 will be explained in detail. .

The length of the reference time Td1 is set as the time corresponding to the time from when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until it passes through the right guide section 643.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the first operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, after the fluctuating display of the second symbol is finished (usually An entry state in which the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing path KR1 for a reference time Td1 (0.1 seconds after passage of the ball is detected in the winning opening (through gate) 765) (In the figures, it is also indicated as "shin". The same applies in subsequent figures).

In the first operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing route KR1 until about 3.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, exceeding the reference time Td1. This state is maintained (usually about 3.0 seconds elapse by the end of the symbol change).

As a result, when the passing of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to execution of a right-handed ball, the length is sufficient to guide the ball that has reached the left guide section 645 to the first ball throwing section 734. The state in which the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 can then be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, the movable plate member 641 can enter the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passing is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can enter the first ball throwing path KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and causing it to flow to the right, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the second ball-throwing section 736.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. The situation where the ball enters the mouth 640 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is obtained can be made more likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the second operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the electric accessory 640a is activated immediately before the elapse of the reference time Td1. The movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it enters the first ball throwing route KR1, and immediately after the elapse of the reference time Td1, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a is retracted from the first ball throwing route KR1 (in the figure, It is also indicated as ``retreat'' (the same applies in subsequent figures).

In the second operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing path KR1 until approximately 1.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, exceeding the reference time Td1. This state is maintained (usually about 1.0 seconds elapses until the symbol changes end).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to right-handed hitting, even if the ball reaches the left guide section 645, the ball is transferred to the first ball throwing section 734. To make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 in a right-handed game, since it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 maintains a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing route KR1 with a length sufficient to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in a right-handed game. I can't.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can enter the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passage is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can be moved into the first ball throwing route KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and flowing it to the right, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the second ball-throwing section 736. Since the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the advanced state for 0.5 seconds after the ball reaches the right guide section 643, the ball can be stably thrown toward the second ball throwing section 736 side.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. The situation where the ball enters the mouth 640 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is obtained can be made more likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 14(c), in the third operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, after the fluctuating display of the second symbol is finished (usually After 0.1 seconds have passed since the passing of the ball was detected in the winning opening (through gate) 765), the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the state of entering the first ball throwing route KR1, and the reference time Td1 Immediately before the elapse of , the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1 (also referred to as "retreat" in the figure. The same applies in subsequent figures), and the reference time Td1 elapses. Immediately thereafter, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1.

In the third operation pattern, after the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the electric accessory 640a moves along the first ball throwing path KR1 until about 3.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. The state in which it has entered is maintained (usually about 3.0 seconds pass until the symbol changes end).

As a result, when the passing of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to execution of a right-handed ball, the length is sufficient to guide the ball that has reached the left guide section 645 to the first ball throwing section 734. The state in which the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 can then be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can be set in a state where it is evacuated from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passage is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can be moved away from the first ball throwing route KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and causing it to flow to the right, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the second ball-throwing section 736.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. A situation in which a ball enters the mouth 640 and the special symbol 2 is drawn can be made less likely to occur.

In addition, if the normal symbol (second symbol) continues to fluctuate at the timing when the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the ball will be moved to the right. It may happen that the electric accessory 640a is brought into the entering state when reaching the first ball throwing route KR1. In this case, the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 enters the second winning hole 640, and the special symbol 2 lottery can be won.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), in the fourth operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a After the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throw path KR1 and changes to the advanced state, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state again just before the reference time Td1 elapses. In the fourth operation pattern, the control is completed at the reference time Td1 (about 0.5 seconds usually elapses by the end of the symbol variation).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to right-handed hitting, even if the ball reaches the left guide section 645, the ball is transferred to the first ball throwing section 734. To make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 in a right-handed game, since it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 maintains a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing route KR1 with a length sufficient to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in a right-handed game. I can't.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can be set in a state where it is evacuated from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passage is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can be moved away from the first ball throwing route KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and causing it to flow to the right, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the second ball-throwing section 736.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. A situation in which a ball enters the mouth 640 and the special symbol 2 is drawn can be made less likely to occur. That is, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64, the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be repeatedly obtained.

According to each of the operation patterns described in detail above, in a game state in which the player aims to win a jackpot by acquiring the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery, it is possible to create special symbol lottery acquisition patterns in different modes.

For example, in the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, since it is possible to aim at winning the special symbol 2 lottery in a right-handed game, the above-mentioned "right-handed navigation" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable.

Furthermore, in the first operation pattern, the period in which the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)) is long, and the period in which the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. Since the moving plate member 641 is in the state of entering the first ball throwing route KR1 when the reference time Td1 has elapsed after the passage of the ball is detected, even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64, A lottery of special symbol 2 can be won with a part of the balls swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage suffered by the player when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a right-handed game.

On the other hand, in the third operation pattern, the period in which the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the entering state (see FIG. 7(b)) is long, but after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. When the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1, so when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, a normal symbol (second symbol) is created. When the ball starts to fluctuate, the ball passes through the front side of the moving plate member 641 and is guided to the sensor SE.

That is, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the possibility of winning the special symbol 2 lottery with the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 can be reduced. Thereby, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a right-handed game, the disadvantage suffered by the player can be increased compared to the case with the first operation pattern.

For example, in the second operation pattern and the fourth operation pattern, it is difficult to aim for the special symbol 2 lottery in a right-handed game because the operation time of the electric accessory 640a is too short. It is preferable to recommend a left-handed game without displaying the above-mentioned "right-handed navigation" on the symbol display device 81.

In this case, in the second operation pattern, the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 when the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the passing of the ball was detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. state (see FIG. 7(b)), even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 2 lottery is won with a part of the ball that is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. can do.

Thereby, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be alternately drawn to draw a special symbol that the player can obtain when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a left-handed game. In addition, if the movable plate member 641 is in the entry state after the passing of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the special symbol 2 lottery can be obtained only through the normal winning. This is a case where the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to fluctuate at the same time as the ball passes through the opening (through gate) 765, so when the passage of the ball is detected at the ordinary winning opening (through gate) 765, the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) begins to fluctuate. 2 symbol) continues to fluctuate, the effect of making it easier to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery cannot be achieved.

On the other hand, in the second operation pattern (or fourth operation pattern), the period from the detection of the ball at the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 to the end of the operation control of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, compared to the first and third operation patterns where the same time width is set to 3 seconds, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) will be suspended. . Therefore, the effect that it is easy to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery can be achieved with high probability.

On the other hand, in the fourth operation pattern, the entry state of the movable plate member 641 (see FIG. 7(b)) is short as in the second operation pattern, and the ball does not pass through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Since the movable plate member 641 is set in the retracted state when the reference time Td1 has passed after being detected, when the ball enters the first prize opening 64, the special symbol 2 is drawn by the ball that is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. can reduce the possibility of acquiring Thereby, the special symbol 1 lottery can account for most of the special symbols that the player can obtain when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a left-handed game.

As described in detail above, according to each operation pattern, it is possible to create special symbol lottery acquisition patterns in different modes in a gaming state where the aim is to win a jackpot by acquiring the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. .

Returning to FIG. 13(b), the difference in profits obtained by the player between the jackpot with special symbol 1 and the jackpot with special symbol 2 will be explained.

First, the probability of winning the jackpot in the maximum round (15 rounds in this embodiment) is higher for special symbol 2. Of the jackpots for special symbol 1, the jackpot for the maximum round is 20%, while the jackpot for special symbol 2 is 100% for the maximum round. Therefore, at least in terms of the number of prize balls, the profit that the player obtains from a jackpot with the special symbol 2 is larger than the profit that the player obtains from a jackpot with the special symbol 1.

In addition, in the case of a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, if the special symbol 2 is a jackpot, it will be a 100% right-handed game, and you can repeatedly win the special symbol 2 lottery, but if the special symbol 1 is a jackpot. In 30% of the games (jackpot B), a left-handed game is recommended instead of a right-handed game, and special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately.

In this case, in a left-handed game, in addition to being less time efficient to obtain a special symbol lottery compared to a right-handed game, the special symbol 1 lottery is executed at 1/2, so the maximum round jackpot is There will be more hurdles to overcome.

In addition, in the case where the probability is low after the end of the jackpot game, if the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (jackpot c), it will be a right-handed game and you can repeatedly win the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 will be a jackpot. In (Jackpot C), a left-handed game is recommended instead of a right-handed game, and special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately.

In this case, in a left-handed game, in addition to being less time efficient to obtain a special symbol lottery compared to a right-handed game, the special symbol 1 lottery is executed at 1/2, so the maximum round jackpot is There will be more hurdles to overcome.

Furthermore, although the condition that the special symbol is drawn 100 times is the same, if it is jackpot C, it is easy to obtain the special symbol 2 drawn 100 times, whereas with jackpot C, it is easy to obtain the special symbol 1. Since 100 drawings are completed with 50 drawings and 50 drawings of the special symbol 2, it is practically possible to obtain the drawing of the special symbol 2 only 50 times.

In summary, compared to the jackpot due to the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot from the special symbol 2 lottery is at least as follows: firstly, it is easier to obtain the maximum round jackpot, and secondly, the special symbol 2 lottery It has the advantage that it is easy to obtain a game state repeatedly, and thirdly, it is easy to maintain a high time efficiency for obtaining a lottery of special symbols by playing right-handed games.

In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery with the special symbol 2 is executed preferentially, the explanation was made on the assumption that the variation time related to the lottery is selected with probability from the options of about 3 seconds to 5 minutes. It is not limited to. For example, in the case where the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn at the same time, a game state may be configured in which the variation time related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 is intentionally set to be long.

That is, for example, in 100 special symbol drawings after the end of jackpot B or after the end of jackpot C, the variation time of the drawing of special symbol 2 may always be set to 10 minutes. In this case, on the premise that the ball entering the first winning hole 64 passes through the sensor SE and the second winning hole 640 alternately, the reserved number of special symbols 2 becomes full. If the ball enters the first winning hole 64 after the ball passes through the second winning hole 640, the special symbol 2 lottery cannot be won, and the special symbol 1 lottery will be repeatedly executed. Become.

In addition, the player can play the game without letting the ball enter the first winning hole 64 when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, but in this case, the time efficiency of the game may be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of jackpots that occur within the same period of time. This makes it easier for the game machine store to avoid operating in the red.

In the above-mentioned gaming state, the balls that are flown to the right from the seesaw member 762 have the benefit of winning the special symbol 2 lottery and the benefit of receiving the payout of the prize balls until the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full. Since it is given to the player, the profit that the player can get from the ball being swept to the left from the seesaw member 762 is that it gives the player the profit of winning the lottery of special symbol 1 and the profit of receiving the payout of the prize ball. is large.

On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, the balls that are flown to the right from the seesaw member 762 only give the player the benefit of receiving the payout of prize balls, so the special symbols 1 The profit obtained by the player is smaller than that of the ball thrown to the left from the seesaw member 762 by the amount of the profit obtained by winning the lottery.

In other words, the magnitude of the profit given to the player for the balls swept to the right side from the seesaw member 762 and the balls swept to the left side can be switched depending on whether or not the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming state, the operation of the movable plate member 641 based on the detection of a ball in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 may be configured to be selected by lottery from a plurality of operation patterns.

For example, the second operation pattern may be used for 5% of the operations, and the remaining 95% may be controlled so that the fourth operation pattern is used for the remaining 95% of the operations. In this case, if the movable plate member 641 operates in the second operation pattern, there is an advantage that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be obtained, so that attention to the movable plate member 641 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, if the fourth operation pattern is operated, the special symbol 1 lottery can be won, but if the movable plate member 641 is operated in the second operation pattern, Since there is a disadvantage that it is not possible to obtain both special symbols 1 and 2 by lottery, attention to the movable board member 641 can be improved in this case as well. That is, whether the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full or not, the attention to the moving plate member 641 can be improved.

In addition, in the case where the lottery is executed simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, a game state may be configured in which the variation time related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 is intentionally set to be long. For example, by always setting the variation time of the lottery for special symbol 1 to 10 minutes, the result of the lottery for special symbol 1 will be obtained in a gaming state where both the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2 can occur. The special symbol 2 lottery can be executed multiple times beforehand. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a jackpot will occur unintentionally due to the lottery of special symbol 1, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A ball flowing down the right inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged, and a ball flowing down the left inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is not arranged, It is possible to equalize the flow rate.

Also, the position where the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 branches into the flow path on the second winning opening 640 side (for example, the first ball throwing route KR1), or the position where the ball falls on the second winning opening 640 side (for example, , the upper ball passage hole 713, and the lower ball passage hole 714), the flow direction of the ball has a front-back component. Thereby, it is possible to highlight a location closely related to the flow of the ball to the second winning hole 640.

Further, the paths to the second prize opening 640 will merge on the front side of the lower ball passage hole 714, but this merge position is sufficiently far away from the movable plate member 641. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving plate member 641 is subjected to a load from the balls colliding at the merging position. In addition, by shifting the left and right positions of the upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 and expanding the left and right width of the second prize opening 640 to more than two balls, the front side of the lower ball passing hole 714 It may also be possible to avoid merging of the channels at.

In addition, it is possible to manage so that the next ball is not detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 after the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends. It is possible to form the following cases. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled when the ball is detected can act on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 in a timely manner.

In addition, the movable plate member 641 is arranged to be able to act on the balls that have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and on the balls that have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 and 67. . Thereby, the usability of the movable plate member 641 can be increased.

In other words, even in a game state in which the movable plate member 641 is recommended for a left-handed game in which the ball is aimed at entering the first prize opening 64, a right-handed game in which the ball is aimed at the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is recommended. It can be used effectively even in a gaming state in which Note that this effect is not limited to bilaterally symmetrical board surfaces, but is also an effect that can be achieved, for example, on asymmetrical board surfaces (for example, a configuration in which the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 66 is omitted).

Regarding the number of balls riding on the movable plate member 641, while a plurality of balls can ride on the left guide section 645 at the same time, the number of balls riding on the right guide section 643 is limited to one. As a result, the durability of the movable plate member 641 can be improved by configuring the right guide portion 643 to be more durable than the left guide portion 645.

Moreover, by preparing a plurality of operation patterns of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to create acquisition patterns for special symbol lottery in different modes. For example, when the ball repeatedly enters the first winning hole 64, a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery is repeatedly obtained, and a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery are alternately obtained. Can be switched.

In addition, when a right-handed game is recommended as a winning pattern for the special symbol lottery, if the ball accidentally enters the first winning hole 64, a pattern that makes it easy to repeatedly acquire the special symbol 1 lottery, and a seesaw member. It is possible to switch between a pattern in which acquisition of the special symbol 1 lottery is avoided with a high probability for the ball swept to the right side in 762.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 24. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 when the ball flows down one of the routes distributed by the route configuration device 700 has been described, but the distribution unit of the second embodiment At 980, the ball is configured to pass through detection devices SE4 and SE5, which normally serve as through gates, in a plurality of paths through which the ball is sorted. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 in the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 15, illustration of units other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 15, a through hole 2060a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 is formed in the base plate 60 by router processing below the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached.

The through hole 2060a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, in a front view, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back side of the front unit 940, a drive unit 960 arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the The displacement member 966 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the driving force of a drive unit 960. Note that the displacement member 966 will be explained later.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done.

The drive unit 960 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, and is connected to the wing member 945 disposed on the front unit 940 via a displacement member 966. Thereby, as the displacement member 966 is operated by the driving force of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the wing member 945 will be given later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 16(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 18 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit 940. Note that in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated with hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the front unit 940 includes a back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The rear base 941 has an approximately T-shape with an upside-down outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is penetrated through the back base 941. The inside of the hole 2060a can be visually confirmed.

The back base 941 includes a first out port 71 formed with a cutout at the lower end, a specific winning port 65a located above the first out port 71, and formed through a horizontally long rectangular shape, and It mainly includes a second winning hole 640 that is formed penetratingly above the winning hole 65a, and a first winning hole 64 that is cut out and formed on the edge (upper edge) on the opposite side to the first out hole 71.

The back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a extending in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through hole 941a is formed from a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side toward the back side, and a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter decreases from the back side toward the front side.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded part of the tapping screw. be done.

Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side toward the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to a positioning hole formed around the through hole 2060a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning a prize opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened to the rear base 941 from the rear side with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the back base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (playing area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side toward the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heads of the screws from protruding toward the back side of the back base 941. As a result, when the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the gravity direction of the back base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the bottom of the notch (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is spaced apart from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, any of the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the specific winning hole 65a, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2) Game balls that have not flowed in can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first prize opening 64 is formed to have an inner edge larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving part 941g, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 16(b)) via the first prize opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, there is a first receiving part 941g formed in a cup shape and protruding toward the gaming area side (the front side of the page in FIG. 16(a)), and a first receiving part 941g on the side opposite to the gaming area (FIG. b) A first ball throwing portion 942g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side in the drawing.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed in a size that can receive one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving part 941g (first winning opening 64) in the direction of gravity can be made to flow into the inside of the first receiving part 941g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is formed with a bottom surface inclined downwardly toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving part 941g can be thrown to the back side (first ball throwing part 942g side) via the first prize opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g includes guide portions 941g1 extending downward from the upper end portions of both ends of the base plate 60 in the transverse direction (left-right direction in FIG. 16) so as to be inclined outward in the left-right direction. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the gaming area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving part 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving part 941g due to the game ball flowing down the downstream area colliding with the first receiving part 941g.

Furthermore, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, there is a possibility that there will be insufficient placement of game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to change the downward direction of the game ball. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flowing direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost. .

Further, the guide portion 941g1 can guide the game ball outward in the left-right direction when the game ball flowing down the front side of the back base 941 toward the second winning opening 640 side collides with the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the probability of a game ball entering the second winning hole 640 from becoming excessively high.

The first ball throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first ball throwing section 942g is formed with a bottom surface inclined downward toward the back side, and a protruding tip side thereof comes into contact with an edge of an inlet 982d of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving part 941g to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first prize opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 in which the upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side. The first recessed cutout 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second prize opening 640 is formed through the hole in a substantially D-shape with an upward curve when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball thrown between the opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown from the second winning opening 640 to the back side.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is formed with a front side wall part 941b projecting toward the front side and a second ball throwing part 942c projecting toward the back side at its edge.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface comes into contact with a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball throwing portion 942c is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 640. The second ball throwing portion 942c is set to have a dimension larger in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16(b)) than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, can be prevented from falling from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

The pair of second ball throwing parts 942c are arranged such that the distance between the opposing sides in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 16(b)) is the width direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. The length is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction (FIG. 16(b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside.

The second ball throwing section 942c is arranged inside the displacement member 966 in the assembled state, and is arranged to face the displacement member 966 in the vertical and horizontal directions. The width between the outer surfaces of the second ball throwing portion 942c is slightly shorter than the width between the inner surfaces of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 966. Thereby, the second ball throwing portion 942c can limit the left-right displacement of the displacement member 966.

The back base 941 is recessed in two places in a circular shape from the gaming area side of the back base 941 toward the side opposite to the gaming area on the upper side near the second winning opening 640 (first winning opening 64 side). A first shaft hole 941d, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating through the back base 941, and the opposing outer sides of the two first openings 941e. and a first guide wall 942b located at and protruding from the rear side.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. Further, the first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. This can prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide vertical displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced, and the distance between the pair of opposing first guide walls 942b is as follows: It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction (left-right direction).

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a has an opening formed in a long rectangular shape in the direction in which the pair of wing members 945 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 16(b)), and an opening/closing plate of a specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is located inside the opening. will be placed.

The back base 941 has a bulging part 942h that bulges out between the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball throwing part 942c, and a bulging part 942h that bulges between the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball throwing part 942c, and a first guide wall 942b side (upper side in FIG. 16(b)) from the outer frame of the specific winning opening 65a. ) and a second guide wall 942d that projects.

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back side of the back base 941, and is connected to the outer frame of the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball throwing portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (described later) is disposed on the rear side of the rear base 941, the contact area between the displacement member 966 and the rear surface of the rear base 941 can be reduced, and the friction (sliding) of the displacement member 966 can be reduced. ) resistance can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the width direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) can be restricted.

Therefore, in the displacement member 966, not only is the above-mentioned second ball throwing section 942c disposed on the inside so that the displacement in the left and right direction is limited, but also the second guide wall 942d is disposed on the outside so that the displacement in the left and right direction is limited. Ru. Thereby, the left-right displacement of the displacement member 966 can be restricted for a long period of time.

The back base 941 includes second out ports 941f formed by cutting out a semicircular shape toward the bottom at the upper edges of both left and right ends of the specific winning a prize port 65a. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has entered the third receiving part 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60, and has a shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is formed.

Further, a third ball throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing part 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of a U-shape in rear view is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes to the back side, and the third ball throwing part 942e is formed to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape in rear view protrudes to the back side. can be rolled to the back side.

The back base 941 has a third through hole 941i that is formed to extend linearly upward from the upper end of the first opening 941e, and a first A fourth through hole 941j formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 941d, and a ball throwing hole 941k formed with a size that allows a game ball to pass between the pair of third through holes 941i. , and a rolling plate portion 941l extending toward the back side with the lower edge of the ball feeding hole 941k as the base end.

The third through hole 941i is a through hole for passing the extension portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e to the back side when the wing member 945 is assembled. Further, the fourth through hole 941j is a through hole for allowing displacement of the extended portion 945d during operation of the wing member 945, and the displacement locus of the extended portion 945d in a front view (view in the axial direction of the shaft member 945a). The hole is drilled in a shape that includes the whole. Note that since the plate-like portion 945e is disposed on the back side passing through the back base 941, it is not necessary to consider the displacement locus of the plate-like portion 945e.

The ball throwing hole 941k is an opening for throwing the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e to the front side when the wing member 945 is in the open state. Since the lower part of the ball throwing hole 941k is left open on the front side of the ball throwing hole 941k (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the possibility that a ball enters the ball throwing hole 941k from the front side can be reduced.

That is, while forming the front side region of the ball-throwing hole 941k as a meeting point for the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e and the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the wing-shaped main body 945, the ball that has passed through the ball-throwing hole 941k is formed. The flow can be directed exclusively to the front side.

The rolling plate portion 941l is formed as an inclined plate that slopes upward toward the back side, and is configured to cause the ball riding on the extended distal end side to flow down toward the base end side (front side). The ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941 and reached the base end passes through the ball sending hole 941k and reaches the front side of the back base 941 (the space between the back base 941 and the front base 943). , then it will flow down.

The front base 943 is formed into an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-shaped body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and back base 941.

The front base 943 is mainly formed with a second receiving part 943c and a third receiving part 944a that are protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 640 and the second out opening 941f of the above-mentioned back base 941. be done.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the back, and the second winning opening 640 of the back base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are provided on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape).

Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the opposing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and to suppress the game ball from flowing into the second prize opening 640 from the outside between the opposing sides of a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c includes a ball throwing guide portion 943d that projects inward from the inner edge thereof, and a rolling portion 943a that projects from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

A pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed below the pair of wing members 945. Further, the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end surfaces come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed between the pair of opposing wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on the lower side between the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and is formed such that an upper end surface 943a1 is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. Moreover, as mentioned above, the rolling part 943a is arranged at the inner lower end of the second prize opening 640 in the state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the back side. It protrudes from the back side of the base 941.

Thereby, the game ball thrown between the pair of ball throwing guide parts 943d facing each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end surface 943a1, and the back surface of the back base 941 Can throw the ball to the side.

Further, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, into which the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be held and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, which face each other.

The third receiving portion 944a has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving part 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving part 944a can be passed through the second outlet 941f to the rear surface. He can throw the ball to the side.

A pair of wing members 945 are arranged with the second prize opening 640 formed in the back base 941 sandwiched therebetween when viewed from the front. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 includes a wing-like main body 945m formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front and having a thickness smaller than the width between the facing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and a back side of the wing-like main body 945m. A protrusion 945b protruding from the wing-shaped body 945m, an insertion hole 945c formed through the wing-shaped body 945m in the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side), and an insertion hole 945c located at the end of the wing-shaped body 945m. A connecting portion 945d extends from the opposite end to the rear side, and a plate extends from the distal end side of the extending portion 945d in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16(a)) of the wing-shaped main body 945m. It mainly includes a plate-like portion 945e that extends in the shape of a plate.

The extended portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e are configured to pass through the through-holes 941i, 941j in the assembled state (see FIG. 16(a)) and to be operable inside the distribution unit 980. will be described later.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the back base 941 and the front base 943, by inserting the shaft member 945a into the insertion hole 945c, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the wing member 945 is rotatable. Can be placed between opposite sides. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state (see FIG. 16(a)) in which the rotating tip side is close to each other, and an open state in which the rotating tip side is displaced to open both left and right outwards.

The protrusion 945b is inserted into a sliding groove 966a2 of a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission portion to which the driving force of the drive unit 960 is transmitted. The protrusion 945b is dimensioned such that its tip can pass through the first opening 941e of the back base 941, protrude toward the back side of the back base 941, and be inserted into the sliding groove 966a2.

The displacement member 966 is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from the upper end, and a bulging portion that protrudes toward the rear side from the lower end. 966b, and a second opening 966c is formed therethrough at approximately the center position when viewed from the front.

The second opening 966c has an inner edge shape larger than the second winning opening 640 when viewed from the front, and the second winning opening 640 is arranged inside. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 640 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The protruding portion 966a includes contact portions 966a1 located on both outer sides in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966 and extending in the longitudinal direction, and a sliding groove 966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction. , is provided.

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both widthwise opposing inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which the transmission member of the drive unit 960 is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member.

In response to the displacement member 966 being placed in the lower position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state. On the other hand, in response to the displacement member 966 being placed in the upper position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 is brought into the open state.

Next, the distribution unit 980 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 20(a) is a diagram taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 19(a). 20(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a).

The distribution unit 980 includes a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a distribution section rotatably disposed between the front base 981 and the rear base. 983. Note that the distribution section 983 is a member corresponding to the seesaw member 762 in the first embodiment.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed above the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d extending through the outer edge of the base portion 985a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed from the front base 981 side toward the back side at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) of the base portion 985a. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the opening 985b and the opening 985c are formed such that the lower inner surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side (back side) of the front base 981.

The opening 985e is formed closer to the opening 985b than the left-right center position, and the opening 985f is formed closer to the opening 985c than the left-right center position. In the following, since the openings 985e and 985f have similar configurations, a detailed explanation will be given of the opening 985f that can receive the balls that have flown down the second passage TR2, and the opening 985f that can accept the balls that have flowed down the first passage TR1. A description of the opening 985e will be omitted.

The opening 985f extends in the direction of gravity and connects the inflow passage 985f1, which is a space that opens on the front base 981 side, and the discharge passage 985f3, which has a space that opens on the side opposite to the front base 981, and extends in the direction of gravity. 19(b) and FIG. 20(a)).

The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to a second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985, which will be described later, and is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The intermediate passage 985f2 is formed to extend in the direction of gravity, has an upper side communicated with the inflow passage 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passage 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passage 985f2.

The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3, and a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction where the detection hole SE1a is not formed.

Further, the detection device SE3 is arranged such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passage 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Ru. Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the upper side of the intermediate passage 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passage 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portion 985f4 is formed to be continuous with the space of the inflow passage 985f1 and the discharge passage 985f3. That is, the intermediate passage 985f2 is formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passage 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the lower side of the intermediate passage 985f2, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the insertion hole of the passage unit 990 in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985f3, and the ball can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed at the lower end of the back base 985 at the left-right center position. Further, the opening 985g is formed such that the lower inner surface is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to a second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985, which will be described later, and is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The rear base 985 has an opening 985k, which is a cutout for arranging the detection devices SE4, SE5 in the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 (described later), which has approximately the same external shape as the detection devices SE4, SE5 when viewed from the rear. Formed by shape. Thereby, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981). Note that the structures of the detection devices SE4 and SE5 are the same as those described above as the structure of the detection device SE3, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the inner space of the detection hole SE1a and the first passage TR1 or It is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the space of the two passages TR2.

Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the upper side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, it can pass through the detection holes SE1a of the detection devices SE4 and SE5. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Moreover, since the detection devices SE4 and SE5 are formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, it is possible to easily utilize the weight of the game ball when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the connecting portion between the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The detection devices SE4 and SE5 are configured as devices in which a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn when it is detected that a ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a.

The opening 985k is formed to be continuous with the space of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 in the direction of gravity. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the opposite side of the back base 985). It is formed mainly of a protruding portion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f, and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 15) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b standing upright on the front side along the edge thereof.

In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 640 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 640 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright tip surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 18) of the winning hole unit 930 when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. be done. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the lower inner surface located below the end surface 943a1 (see FIG. 18) of the rolling portion 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side. It is formed by

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion, and a wall shape extending toward the rear base 985 side at approximately the left and right center position when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with an erected wall 982a, and recesses 982e to 982j formed as curved surfaces that can throw game balls to the back side at a plurality of locations under the direction of gravity.

The bulging portion 982 also includes a ball throwing opening 982k that is formed in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the standing wall 982a, and an insertion opening 982l that is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides of the ball-throwing opening 982k. and a rotation permitting opening 982m formed in a shape extending outward from the upper end of the insertion opening 982l to the left and right sides.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inflow port 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 on the upper edge thereof that protrudes toward the side opposite to the back base 985 side. The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 (see FIG. 18) of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60. In this case, the second protrusion 982d1 comes into contact with the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 19(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the lower end surface of the inlet 982d is the distance from the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 to the lower inner edge of the first ball throwing section 942g. The distance is set to be larger than the distance up to the dimension L15 (see FIG. 16(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the upright wall 982a is formed below the inlet 982d, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in an upper side having a triangular shape when viewed from the upright direction.

The vertical distance between the erected wall 982a and the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and between the opposing sides there is a first passage TR1 and a space through which the game ball can pass. A second passage TR2 is formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c that protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 is formed on the upper side of the standing wall 982a. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulge 982 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The balls guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 are guided to a ball discharge passage (not shown). That is, the ball guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 is ejected without giving any profit to the player, like the ball that has flowed into the first outlet 71.

Note that various changes can be made to the profit given to the player by the ball guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2. For example, it may be designed as a profit in which a preset number of prize balls are paid out, or it may be designed as a profit obtained when a ball is detected by a detection device for performing a normal symbol lottery or a jackpot lottery. Also good.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulge 982 in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend downward by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the second passage TR2, and the game balls that have flowed into the second passage TR2 can also flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

Ball throwing opening 982k is formed between recess 982h and recess 982j. Moreover, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the ball throwing opening 982k. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized.

The rolling surface 982g formed on the lower side of the third branch passage BK3 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. As a result, the third branch passage BK3 becomes a passage through which game balls flowing down the back side of the front base 981 can pass to the front side of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. .

In this embodiment, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the received game ball is transferred to the ball throwing opening 982k and the ball throwing hole 941k ( The ball flows toward the front side through the ball (see FIG. 16(a)) and is configured to be able to enter the second winning hole 640.

The inclined portion 982b of the bulging portion 982 is formed below the bulging portion 982, and extends downward toward the rear base 985 side. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed across the left and right width direction of the bulge portion 982 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined.

As a result, by bringing the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, and the second branch passage BK2 into contact with the inclined part 982b, the game balls flowing down are directed toward the openings 985b to 985f. (back side) so that it can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

On the other hand, by bringing the game ball flowing down the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the rolling surface 982g, the game ball flowing down is guided to the throwing ball opening 982k side (front side), making it easier to flow into the throwing ball opening 982k. be able to.

The rolling surface 982g does not have a left-right symmetric shape when viewed from the front, but has a left-right asymmetric shape because the left side is formed lower than the right side. As a result, when balls simultaneously reach the third branch passage BK3 from the left and right sides, it is possible to easily avoid the balls from lining up left and right in the third branch passage BK3, and the direction in which the balls are lined up (serial direction) has a vertical component. It can be made to have. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid clogging of the balls in the third branch passage BK3, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the wing member 945 becomes inoperable due to clogging of the balls.

The insertion opening 982l is an opening for inserting the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e of the wing member 945 into the back side of the bulging portion 982 when assembling the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base member 60. be.

That is, in the assembled state of the winning opening unit 930, the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e (see FIG. 16(b)) that are inserted into the third through hole 941i of the back base 941 and protrude to the back side are the parts of the throwing unit 970. A plate-like portion 945e is disposed on the back side of the bulging portion 982, with the extending portion 945d passing through the insertion opening 982l.

The rotation permitting opening 982m is an opening that is formed to penetrate within a necessary range in order to avoid restricting the displacement of the extending portion 945d that penetrates the bulging portion 982. By forming the rotation allowance opening 982m with a minimum size (width smaller than the diameter of the game ball), it is possible to avoid throwing the game ball to the front side through the rotation allowance opening 982m. Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the displacement of the plate-shaped portion 945e due to the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). FIG. 21(a) shows the wing member 945 (plate-like portion 945e) in a closed state, and FIG. 21(b) shows the wing member 945 (plate-like portion 945e) in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is evacuated from the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are exposed to the opening 985e, Flowed to 985f. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided to the third branch passage BK3 side.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the open state of the wing member 945, the plate-shaped portion 945e enters the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and flows down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. The ball is flown to the third branch passage BK3 side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided to the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the wing member 945 is configured to be able to switch the side on which the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is guided by being switched between the open state and the closed state. In other words, the wing member 945 not only acts to switch the guiding direction of the ball flowing down the area between the back base 941 and the front base 943 where the wing-like main body 945m (see FIG. 17) is arranged. , acts to switch the guiding direction of the balls flowing down the inner region of the distribution unit 980 in which the plate-shaped portion 945e is arranged.

A case will be described in which the wing member 945 opens and closes immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. The upstream branch position BK0 is set as a position immediately before the position where the falling ball is affected by the wing member 945. Immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the open state of the wing member 945, when the wing member 945 opens and closes toward the closed state, the ball is pushed into the third branch passage BK3 side by the plate-shaped portion 945e.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 opens and closes toward the open state immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the closed state of the wing member 945, the ball is guided to the openings 985e and 985f, or is guided to the first branch. It is guided to the passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2.

In this way, the movement direction side of the wing member 945 is not obstructed, and a space sufficient to guide the ball in the movement direction side is formed, so that the ball is sandwiched between the wing member 945 and the bulging portion 982. This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the balls become jammed.

When guided to the openings 985e and 985f, the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 and can win the lottery of special symbol 1, and can receive the benefit of the payout of the prize ball, but the first branch When guided to the passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2, neither the drawing of the special symbol 1 nor the profit of paying out the prize balls can be obtained.

Therefore, if the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 while the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the player may be disadvantaged by the wing member 945 opening and closing immediately thereafter. Therefore, attention to the upstream branch position BK0 and the wing member 945 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), since the wing member 945 and the wing-like portion 945e are configured in a symmetrical shape, the ball flowing down in the first passage TR1 and the ball flowing down in the second passage TR2 form the wings. It is possible to make it so that there is no difference in the ease of picking up due to the member 945. In addition, prevention of ball clogging when balls are simultaneously guided from the left and right sides is achieved by making the shape of the rolling surface 982g as the rolling surface of the third branch passage BK3 bilaterally asymmetrical as described above.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 19 and 20. The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L17 (see FIG. 20(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set lower than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small.

Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from getting out of it. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

Next, the operation pattern of the wing member 945 by driving the drive unit 960 will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 21, the relationship between the time required for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 to flow down will be explained.

After the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 reaches the ball throwing path TR0, the distribution unit 983 is tilted and the ball is flown down to the left and right sides. This tilting motion overlaps with the motion of the seesaw member 762 in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), so the explanation will be omitted, but in this embodiment, the time required for the tilting motion is sufficiently long. In order to ensure this, the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are designed to have a large magnetic force. That is, the present embodiment is designed so that the tilting operation of the distribution section 983 (the operation from the state shown in FIG. 8(a) to the state shown in FIG. 8(b)) takes at least 0.8 seconds.

After the tilting operation of the distribution unit 963, when a ball flows from the ball throwing path TR0 to the first path TR1 side, the path is designed so that it takes 0.4 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE4. Furthermore, after the tilting operation of the sorting unit 963, when the ball flows from the ball throwing path TR0 to the second path TR2 side, the path is designed so that it takes 0.2 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE5. . That is, the vertical distance between the detection sensor SE4 and the detection sensor SE5 is set as a distance that requires 0.2 seconds at the falling speed of the ball.

A pair of left and right upstream branch positions BK0 are set as positions immediately before the falling ball receives the action of the wing member 945. It is designed to take 0.6 seconds from the time the ball flows from the ball throwing path TR0 to the first path TR1 side or the second path TR2 side until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

That is, it takes 0.2 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Furthermore, it takes 0.4 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection device SE5 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

If the wing member 945 is in the closed state at the timing when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0, the ball passes through the openings 985b, 985c or the openings 985e, 985f, while the wing member 945 closes at the timing when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. When the member 945 is in the open state, the ball is guided to the third branch passage BK3 side and passes through the ball throwing opening 982k (see FIG. 19(a)).

According to the flow path configuration as described above, the operation pattern of the wing member 945 due to the drive of the drive unit 960 is an operation pattern that ends in a time shorter than 0.6 seconds after the detection device SE4, SE5 detects the ball. If designed in this way, even if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any interval, the normal symbols will start changing as soon as the balls are detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5. can do.

For example, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, and the previous ball flows to the first path TR1 side and is detected by the detection device SE4, the next ball enters the second winning hole 64. There is a gap of 0.8 seconds before flowing to the path TR2 side, and even if the detection device SE5 is located above the detection device SE4 by 0.2 seconds, a gap of 0.6 seconds is secured. That is, it takes 0.6 seconds after the previous ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the next ball is detected by the detection device SE5.

For example, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, and the previous ball flows to the second passage TR2 side and is detected by the detection device SE5, the next ball enters the first winning hole 64. There is a gap of 0.8 seconds before flowing to the passage TR1 side, and since the detection device SE4 is located below the detection device SE5 by 0.2 seconds, a gap of 1.0 seconds is secured. That is, it takes 1.0 seconds after the previous ball is detected by the detection device SE5 until the next ball is detected by the detection device SE4.

In this way, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, the balls are detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 even if the previous ball flows to the left or right. The interval is 0.6 seconds or more.

Based on this premise, the 11th to 14th operation patterns described in this embodiment are completed in 0.5 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 (normally the fluctuation of the symbol Since it is designed to take 0.5 seconds to complete the display, even if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any interval, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 As soon as the ball is detected, the variation of the normal pattern can be started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time delay from occurring from the detection of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 until the operation of the wing member 945 is performed.

FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and time-measured changes in the state of the wing member 945. Note that FIG. 22(a) shows the time measurement change in the eleventh operation pattern, FIG. 22(b) shows the time measurement change in the twelfth operation pattern, and FIG. 22(c) shows the time measurement change in the thirteenth operation pattern. The time-measured changes in the operation pattern are illustrated, and in FIG. 22(d), the time-measured change in the fourteenth operation pattern is illustrated.

In FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d), as a result of the fluctuating display (0.1 seconds) of the second symbol due to the detection of the passing of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the "○" symbol becomes the second symbol. A time-based change in the state of the wing member 945 when displayed on the 2-symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), in the eleventh operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and this open state is maintained for 0.4 seconds.

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Also, the wing member 945 is maintained in the open state even after 0.4 seconds elapse from when it is detected by the detection device SE5 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

Thereby, regardless of whether the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down in the first passage TR1 or in the second passage TR2, the ball can be guided to the third branch passage BK3 side, It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640. That is, the number of lottery tickets won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is larger for the special symbol 2 lottery than for the special symbol 1 lottery ticket.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), in the twelfth operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and this open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. For the next 0.2 seconds, it is in a closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to subsequent figures).

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Although the wing member 945 is maintained in the open state, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state 0.4 seconds after it is detected by the detection device SE5 until reaching the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the first path TR1, the ball can be guided to the third branch path BK3 side, and the ball can be guided to the second winning port 640. However, when the ball flows down in the second passage TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch passage BK3 side and cannot be allowed to enter the second winning hole 640. , the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 20(a)).

That is, in the lottery that is won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately. The case where the ball flows down in the first path TR1 corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), in the 13th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), and then 0.2 After a second, the wing member 945 is brought into an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies to subsequent figures), and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. Thereafter, it is brought into a closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to subsequent figures).

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Although the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the wing member 945 is maintained in the open state after 0.4 seconds from when it is detected by the detection device SE5 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the first path TR1, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch path BK3 side, and the ball enters the second winning port 640. Therefore, the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 20(a)), but if the ball flows down the second passage TR2, the ball is guided to the third branch passage BK3 side. This allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 more easily.

That is, in the lottery that is won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately. The case where the ball flows down in the second path TR1 corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), in the 14th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), and then 0.4 Immediately before the second elapses, the wing member 945 is placed in the open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure. The same applies in subsequent figures), and immediately after that, the wing member 945 is in the closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figures. The same applies in the figure).

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Also, the wing member 945 is maintained in the closed state even after 0.4 seconds elapse from when it is detected by the detection device SE5 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, regardless of whether the ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down in the first path TR1 or the second path TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch path BK3 side. , it is not possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. That is, the number of lottery tickets won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is larger for the special symbol 1 lottery than for the special symbol 2 lottery ticket.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d), by changing the operation pattern of the feather member 945, the lottery won when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 is the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to switch between the drawing of the special symbol 2 and the drawing of the special symbol 2.

That is, when the wing member 945 operates in the eleventh operation pattern, it is possible to continuously obtain the special symbol 2 lottery. Further, when the feather member 945 operates in the 14th operation pattern, it is possible to continuously obtain the special symbol 1 lottery.

When the feather member 945 operates in the 12th operation pattern or the 13th operation pattern, the special lottery symbols obtained for the ball flowing down in the first path TR1 and the ball flowing down in the second path TR2 are different. , the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery are alternately obtained.

Here, if the profit obtained by the player from a jackpot drawn by drawing special symbol 1 is different from the profit obtained by the player from a jackpot drawn by drawing special symbol 2, whether the jackpot is due to the drawing drawn by special symbol 1 or not, Players are paying a lot of attention to whether or not the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine in which balls are distributed to the left and right by the distribution section 983, the lottery of special symbol 1 can be won by the ball thrown to one side of the left or right side (usually the left side) by the distribution section 983; ) was configured so that a special symbol 2 lottery could be won by a ball thrown into the ball.

Therefore, if the distributing unit 983 can confirm whether the ball will be thrown to the left or right, then even if you take your eyes off the ball, you will be able to know whether the lottery to be executed from now on is the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery. was completed. In this case, attention to the falling path of the ball on the downstream side of the distribution section 983 is reduced, resulting in a problem that the game area cannot be effectively used as a performance area.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the 12th operation pattern, the special symbol 2 can be won by the ball flowing down in the first path TR1, and in the 13th operation pattern, the special symbol 2 can be won by the ball flowing down in the second path TR2. You can win 2 lottery tickets. Therefore, just by checking whether the ball is thrown to the left or right by the distribution unit 983, it is not possible to determine whether the ball can win the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery.

That is, on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, it is confirmed whether or not the ball is picked up by the plate-like portion 945e of the wing member 945, or whether the ball passes through the ball throwing hole 941k (see FIG. 18) and flows toward the second side. Unless it is confirmed whether the ball enters the winning hole 640 or not, it is impossible to know whether the ball can win the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery. This makes it possible to improve attention to the falling path of the ball on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, and it is possible to effectively utilize the gaming area as a performance area.

In addition, in each operation pattern, the relationship between the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 and the wing member 945 was mainly explained, but the wing-like main body 945m of the wing member 945 is larger than the back base 941 (see FIG. 15). Since it is disposed on the front side, if a ball flowing down the front side of the rear base 941 reaches the wing member 945 just at the timing when the wing member 945 is in the open state, that ball will be placed in the second position. Naturally, being guided to the prize winning opening 640 may occur.

23 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 16(a), and FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) are the winning slot unit 930 and FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of a ball throwing unit 970.

In FIG. 24(a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 24(b), the open state of the wing member 945 is illustrated. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 23 and 24, FIG. 22 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 23, since the rolling plate portion 941l and the ball throwing hole 941k are arranged on the front side of the ball throwing opening 982k of the distribution unit 980, the internal flow path of the distribution unit 980 connects to the third branch passage BK3. The guided ball flows down towards the front side.

This ball appears to be approaching the player's side from the player's perspective, so it may appear backwards like a ball flowing downward in the gaming area or a ball entering the first prize opening 64 or the third receiving part 944a. By flowing down, the ball is visually recognized in a falling manner that is clearly different from a ball that appears to be moving away from the player.

As a result, by having the player pay attention to the ball that appears to be approaching him/her while playing, the player can see that the ball that entered the first prize opening 64 will be released from the internal flow path of the distribution unit 980. If a situation occurs where the money slips out and flows to the second prize opening 640 side, the occurrence of this situation can be easily noticed.

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a ball enters the second winning hole 640 without the player's awareness and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed without the player's awareness.

Further, the balls flowing down on the front side of the distribution unit 980 (the front side of the back base 941) can act to block the player's line of sight. Therefore, the visibility of the ball while flowing down the internal path of the sorting unit 980 can be easily reduced, so the game ball is guided to the third branch path BK3 and appears to be approaching the player's side. can be made even more noticeable.

Note that since the ball throwing hole 941k is arranged on the back side of the front base 943, if the front base 943 is made of an opaque resin material, the ball that passes through the ball throwing hole 941k and the ball guided to the front side. visibility can be reduced.

In this case, although the ball entering the first prize opening 64 can be easily confirmed, it may be difficult to grasp that the ball is flowing down the ball throwing hole 941k to the front side. It is possible to easily cause a situation in which the entered ball enters the second winning hole 640 without the player's awareness and the special symbol 2 lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 23, a detection device SE6 capable of detecting passage of a ball is disposed on the downstream side (back side) of the second winning opening 640. The detection device SE6 is a device that detects passage of a game ball having the same configuration as the detection device SE3, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof.

The lottery that can be obtained by passing a ball through the detection device SE3 is the special symbol 1 lottery, whereas the lottery that can be acquired by passing the ball through the detection device SE6 is the special symbol 2 lottery.

The operating pattern in which the wing member 945 operates among the 11th to 14th operating patterns (see FIG. 22) is set in advance based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13). be done.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a, or b, the subsequent operation pattern of the wing member 945 is set to the eleventh operation pattern. When the jackpot type is jackpot B or C, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the 12th operation pattern. When the jackpot type is jackpot c, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the thirteenth operation pattern. During periods other than the duration of the eleventh to thirteenth operating patterns, the operating pattern of the wing member 945 is set to the fourteenth operating pattern.

As a result, for the same event that the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and is distributed to the left and right sides, it is possible to determine whether the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 can be won by the ball. It can be changed depending on which operating pattern is used. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the falling path of the ball that has entered the first winning hole 64, and it is possible to attract the player's line of sight.

In addition to the operation pattern shown in FIG. 22, the operation pattern of the wing member 945 is such that the wing member 945 is activated from the timing when a ball is detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 or the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 (see FIG. 2). A long-open operation pattern is also available in which the valve is opened for a long time (approximately 2 seconds).

When the wing member 945 is operated in a long-open operation pattern, the ball that has flown down the near side of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 15) can be easily picked up by the wing-like main body 945m (see FIG. 17). . In addition, the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 can be easily guided to the third branch path BK3 side (see FIG. 21(b)).

In this way, it is easy to create a state in which the ball picked up by the wing-like main body 945m repeatedly enters the second winning hole 640. In addition, the ball that once entered the first winning port 64 is guided to the third branch passage BK3 side by the plate-like portion 945e (see FIG. 21(b)) and finally enters the second winning port 640. Easy to configure into a ball. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game mode in which the lottery with the special symbol 1 is avoided and the lottery with the special symbol 2 is repeatedly obtained.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the ball P21 rides on the wing-shaped main body 945m on the front side of the back base 941, and the ball P21 rides on the plate-shaped part 945e on the back side of the back base 941. The ball P22 can be guided at different front and rear positions (separated positions) at the same time.

Therefore, even if the wing member 945 changes to the closed state in this state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the balls P21 and P22 collide. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a malfunction in which the ball interferes with the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 and the opening/closing operation is not completed.

Furthermore, since the number of balls P22 on the plate-shaped portion 945e can be placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, it is possible to guide them simultaneously when the wing member 945 is in the open state. You can increase the number of balls.

For example, in a game mode in which all balls are fired toward the wing member 945, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, only one ball can be placed on the wing-like body 945m of one wing member 945 at the same time, and multiple balls can be launched at the same time. It is difficult to carry it.

On the other hand, in a game mode in which some of the balls are fired toward the feather member 945 and the remaining balls are fired toward the first winning hole 64, regardless of whether or not the ball is on the feather-shaped body 945m. First, since the balls can be placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, it is easy to get into a state where the balls are placed on one side of the wing member 945 at the same time.

That is, depending on the game mode in which all the balls are fired toward the feather member 945, or the game mode in which some balls are launched toward the first prize opening 64 in addition to the feather member 945, the balls that can be placed on the feather member 945 at the same time. The number of can be changed.

The ball P22 that reaches the feather member 945 via the first prize opening 64 and the ball P21 that reaches the feather member 945 without passing through the first prize opening 64 have different flowing directions before reaching the ball. Since the falling speed of the balls differs after they arrive, the appearance of the balls differs even if they arrive at the same time.

That is, the ball P22 flows vertically downward through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and reaches the plate portion 945e of the wing member 945, while the ball P21 flows through the guide portion 941g1 (see FIG. 16(a)). ), it reaches the wing-like main body 945 m in a downstream direction having a velocity component directed from the left and right outer side to the left and right inner side.

Therefore, since the velocity component in the left-right direction is larger, the velocity of the ball P21 flowing down toward the left-right inner side after reaching the wing member 945 is faster than that of the ball P22. Therefore, even if the balls P21 and P22 reach the wing member 945 at the same time, the time during which the balls P21 and P22 overlap in front view can be shortened, so that the visibility of the balls rolling on the wing member 945 can be reduced. can be improved.

Depending on the timing when the ball P22 rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941l, passes through the ball sending hole 941k, and flows toward the front side of the back base 941, it may collide with the ball P21 (the paths merge).

Here, the upper and lower height positions of the upper surface of the wing member 945 on the rotation base end side are arranged lower than the upper and lower positions of the lower edge of the ball sending hole 941k. As a result, a vertical position where the ball rolling on the rolling plate portion 941l jumps into the front side of the rear base 941, and a vertical position where the ball rolling on the wing-shaped main body 945m jumps into the space between the pair of wing members 945. can be shifted vertically.

Therefore, when the balls collide with each other, the vertical positions of the balls can be shifted, so that a plurality of balls can be caused to flow down in sequence by relying on their own weight. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, in the operation pattern of the long opening of the feather member 945, as can be seen from the fact that the opening duration exceeds 0.6 seconds, for example, a plurality of balls enter the first prize opening 64 without any interval. In the case of a ball, there is a waiting time for the normal symbol to start changing (the normal symbol's fluctuation may be suspended).

Therefore, unlike the case where the timing at which the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the opening/closing timing of the wing member 945 are set to correspond to the time required for the ball to flow down, as explained in FIG. It becomes difficult to make the opening and closing of the wing member 945 correspond to each other.

Therefore, it is not possible to guide all the balls to the second winning port 640 side, and some of the balls that enter the first winning port 64 have the feather member 945 in the closed state (see FIG. 21(a)). There is a possibility that the upstream branch position BK0 will be reached at the right timing.

On the other hand, in the long-open operation pattern, by setting the time during which the wing member 945 is maintained in the closed state (operation waiting time, post-operation waiting time) to a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the wing member The probability that the upstream branch position BK0 will be reached at the timing when 945 is in the closed state (see FIG. 21(a)) can be reduced as much as possible.

The balls P22 rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 945e arrive at intervals of at least 1.8 seconds due to the influence of the operation of the distribution part 983. In other words, it is configured so that a plurality of balls will not ride at the same time.

On the other hand, there is no restriction on the interval at which the balls P21 reach the wing-like main body 945m, and a plurality of balls can reach the wing-like main body 945m at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable to form the wing-like main body 945m stronger than the plate-like portion 945e.

In this regard, in this embodiment, the wing-like main body 945m is formed to be thicker than the plate-like portion 945e, so that it is more durable. Further, since the wing-like main body 945m is directly supported by the shaft member 945a, it is possible to suppress changes in posture and deflection in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the ball.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

By making the plate-like portion 945e protrude from the wing-shaped main body 945m of the wing member 945 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 to the back side, the inside of the sorting unit 980 disposed inside the base plate 60 can be viewed. It is possible to act on the game balls flowing down.

That is, the wing member 945 switches between a state in which it is easy to guide the game ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 to the second winning opening 640 side and a state in which it is prevented from flowing down to the second winning opening 640 side. In addition, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball that has entered the first winning a prize opening 64 is easily guided to the second winning a prize opening 640 side and a state in which it is prevented from flowing down to the second winning a prize opening 640 side.

Furthermore, a back base 941 functioning as a partition plate is disposed between the ball rolling on the top surface of the wing-like main body 945m and the ball rolling on the top surface of the plate-like portion 945e. , it is possible to avoid collisions between balls at arbitrary positions.

As a result, the ball rolling on the wing-shaped main body 945m collides with the ball rolling on the plate-shaped part 945e, and the ball spills from the wing member 945 (the side guided to the second prize opening 640). (spills to the other side) can be avoided.

In addition, at the position where the ball that entered the first winning port 64 is branched into the flow path on the second winning port 640 side (for example, the third branch passage BK3), the flowing direction of the ball has a front-back component. Thereby, it is possible to highlight a location closely related to the flow of the ball to the second winning hole 640.

Further, it is possible to create a case where it is possible to manage the ball so that it is not detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 from the time the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 until the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends. Thereby, the wing member 945 whose operation is controlled when the ball is detected can act on the ball that has passed through the detection devices SE4 and SE5 in a timely manner.

Since there is an interval of at least 0.8 seconds between the timing at which the ball is thrown into the first path TR1 and the timing at which the ball is thrown into the second path TR2, the ball enters the third branch path BK3 from the left and right at the same time. Although this is not necessary, in addition, by forming the rolling surface 982g asymmetrically, it is possible to more easily avoid ball clogging in the third branch passage BK3. This makes it possible to prevent malfunction of the wing member 945 due to ball clogging even if the confluence position of the downward flow path of the balls is close to the wing member 945.

Further, the speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the wing member 945 on the front side of the base plate 60 is different from the speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the wing member 945 inside the base plate 60. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a continuous state in which the balls overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to easily grasp the number of balls rolling on the upper surface of the wing member 945.

Regarding the number of balls that can be mounted on the wing member 945, while a plurality of balls can be mounted on the wing-like main body 945m at the same time, the number of balls that can be mounted on the plate-shaped portion 945e is limited to one. Thereby, the durability of the wing member 945 can be improved by configuring the wing-shaped main body 945m to be more durable than the plate-shaped portion 945e.

Moreover, by preparing a plurality of operation patterns of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to create acquisition patterns for special symbol lottery in different modes. For example, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 repeatedly, there is a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery is repeatedly acquired, a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery are alternately acquired, and a special It is possible to switch between a pattern in which the lottery of symbol 2 is repeatedly obtained.

In addition, in a pattern in which special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery are obtained alternately, it is possible to form a pattern in which which game ball, the right or left, corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery is reversed. As a result, simply checking whether the ball has flowed to the left or right in the distribution section 983 is insufficient information, so it is possible to improve attention to the area downstream of the distribution section 983.

In addition, when right-handed games are recommended as a winning pattern for the special symbol lottery, if the ball accidentally enters the first winning hole 64, there is a pattern in which it is easy to win the special symbol 1 lottery, and a pattern with a high probability. It is possible to switch between a pattern in which the acquisition of the special symbol 1 lottery is avoided.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 when the ball flows down one of the routes sorted by the route configuring device 700, but the route configuring device of the third embodiment In 3700, a normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is provided that can detect the passage of a ball when the ball flows down the other path. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In the route configuring device 3700, a normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is arranged on the left route among the routes distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is arranged so that the distance in the left and right direction from the seesaw member 762 is the same as the distance in the left and right direction between the seesaw member 762 and the normal winning opening (through gate) 765.

Since the normal symbol lottery can be won not only when the game ball entering the first winning hole 64 flows to the right side but also when it flows to the left side, the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 640a can be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 is suspended up to four times. In this case, there is an advantage that it is easy to operate the electric accessory 640a continuously without interrupting the hold, and it is possible to smoothly execute the right-handed game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of passages through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, and 3765 is suspended up to one time. The operation pattern selected in the normal symbol lottery when the number of reserved balls is 0 and the operation pattern selected in the normal symbol lottery when the number of reserved balls is 1 are configured to be different. ing. Since a state in which the number of reserved balls is full (one) is more likely to occur than a state in which the number of reserved balls is four, differences in operation patterns frequently occur.

In the present embodiment, as an example, in a probability variable state, when the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is 0, the second operation pattern is likely to be selected, and when the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is 1, the first operation pattern is selected. The pattern is configured to be easily selected.

On this premise, when the balls enter the first prize opening 64 consecutively (see FIGS. 8 and 9), the electric accessory 640a is brought into the entering state at the timing when the third ball P3 reaches the movable plate member 641. It can be easier to maintain.

That is, the ball P1 is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 765, and the ball P2 is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 3765 before the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the detection. The operation pattern selected by the normal symbol lottery based on the detection of the ball P2 is likely to be the first operation pattern.

Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state even before the ball P3 reaches the moving plate member 641, both the balls P1 and P2 are moved from the state shown in FIG. The ball can be guided to the two-ball throwing section 736.

In addition, in FIG. 8(a), the case where the ball P1 flows to the right side has been explained, but even if the inclination of the seesaw member 762 is reversed and the ball P1 flows to the left side, the normal pattern by detecting the ball P2 The operation pattern selected in the lottery is likely to be the first operation pattern. Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state before the ball P2 reaches the moving plate member 641, the ball P2 can be guided to the second ball throwing section 736.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is one was explained as an example, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, similarly to the explanation in the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol may be set to four.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the first embodiment, the movable plate member 641 includes a right side guide section 643 that guides game balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, and a left side guide that guides game balls that have not entered the first winning hole 64. 645, and the guide parts 643 and 645 are partitioned, but in the route configuring device 4700 of the fourth embodiment, the game balls that did not enter the first prize opening 64 are separated from the guide parts 643 and 645. It is configured so that it can be guided to the 643 side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 26 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 26, the movable plate member 4641, which slides in the front and back direction when the state of the electric accessory 4640a is switched between the retracted state and the advanced state, is connected to the right guide section 643 and the slope of the right guide section 643. An upstream guide section 4645 is provided that extends from the left end of the right guide section 643 toward the upper left along the slope of the surface 643a.

In the upstream guide section 4645, an inclined surface 4645a on which the ball rolls is inclined downward toward the right side, and its inclination angle is the same as the inclination angle of the right guide section 643 (approximately 5 degrees from the horizontal). It is formed.

In this embodiment, openings are formed in the left and right inner walls of the bending member 740 to allow a ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 4641 to pass therethrough. That is, an opening similar to the opening 744 (see FIG. 7(a)) is formed through the left and right inner walls of the bending member 740 (the left wall of the right guide portion 643).

As a result, in addition to the path of the ball passing through the first prize opening 64, a path that rolls through the upstream guide section 4645 and reaches the right guide section 643 is prepared as an inflow path to the first ball throwing path KR1. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the ball rolls from the upstream guide section 4645 through the right guide section 643, depending on the timing of the movement of the moving plate member 4641, the ball may be received in the recovery hole 752, or In some cases, the ball may be accepted by the two-ball throwing section 736.

That is, when the electric accessory 4640a is switched to the retracted state while the ball is placed on the first ball throwing route KR1, the ball flows down toward the recovery hole 752. On the other hand, if the electric accessory 4640a still maintains the entering state when the ball is placed on KR1, the ball passes through the right guide section 643 to the right and flows down toward the second ball throwing section 736. do. That is, the ball rolling to the right on the upper surface of the rigid plate member 4641 can be caused to flow down toward the collection hole 752 or the second ball sending section 736.

The movable plate member 4641 is inclined downward to the lower right, but when a ball fired by right-handed ball passes leftward above the bending member 740 and reaches the movable plate member 4641, the ball is tilted to the left. There is a possibility that the force causes the moving plate member 4641 to pass to the left.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734 is arranged so as to protrude above the left end of the movable plate member 4641. That is, by causing the ball that is about to pass the left end of the moving plate member 4641 to collide with the protruding edge 734b, the ball can be bounced back, and the ball will roll rightward on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641. This makes it easier to create a state where

Furthermore, as the repulsive force of the ball rebounding increases to the right, the time required for the ball to reach the right end of the moving plate member 4641 can be shortened. That is, the protruding edge 734b not only prevents the ball from falling from the left end of the moving plate member 4641, but also prevents the ball from falling from the left end of the moving plate member 4641 while the moving plate member 4641 is maintained in the advanced state. This makes it easier to reach the right end of the image.

Note that the left end portion of the movable plate member 4641 is arranged above the ball passage hole 734a. Therefore, when the electric accessory 4640a is in the approach state, if the ball advances to the left on the upper surface of the movable plate member 4641 and the movable plate member 4641 changes to the retracted state just before reaching the left end, the ball will curve into a parabolic shape. As a result, the ball will fly leftward, and although the probability is low, the ball can enter the ball passing hole 734a of the first ball throwing section 734.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is guided to the second winning hole 640 side by the movable electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, a nail is arranged in the falling path of the ball that enters the first winning port 64 to increase the randomness of the ball flowing down, and there is a probability that the ball will move to the second winning port 640 side due to collision with the nail. You may be guided.

In each of the embodiments described above, the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 is determined by a lottery of normal symbols, but the operation is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be controlled to operate in a fixed pattern from the time the power is turned on. In this case, attention to the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 can be improved.

Further, when the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 operates constantly, the through gate 765 and the detection devices SE4 and SE5 may still be provided. For example, when the passage of the ball is detected, the third symbol display device 81, a sound device, an LED, etc. may be controlled to notify the player that the ball has passed. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily understand that it is time for the ball to flow down near the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the drawing of normal symbols can be suspended, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the normal symbol lottery is not suspended and the normal symbol lottery is not held even if the passage of a ball is detected in the normal winning hole 66 or the like while the normal symbol is changing.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the seesaw member 762 or the distribution section 983 is disposed at a branch position of the downward flow path of the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail may be placed at the branch position, or a protrusion made of a resin material may be placed at the branch position. By colliding with these and the ball, the downstream path of the ball can be branched. In this case, the balls can not only flow down alternately, but also flow down continuously to one side (timing).

In each of the above embodiments, the operation time of the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 is set to a short time of about 0.5 seconds to 3 seconds, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, with a probability of about 10% in the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state for a time longer than 3 seconds (for example, 5 seconds), or the wing member 945 is It may be set to operate in a long open operation pattern in which the open state is maintained.

When operated in the long open operation pattern, it is possible to easily guide the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 to the second winning hole 640 side by the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945. Therefore, among the balls fired while operating in the long open operation pattern (the number of balls is limited considering the firing interval, which is an upper limit of 100 balls per minute), the balls that entered the first prize opening 64 However, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is not guided to the second winning opening 640 side.

When the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 is operating in the long open operation pattern, it is easier to win the special symbol 2 lottery by firing the ball at the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945. This is advantageous for the player. Therefore, before the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 starts operating in the long open operation pattern, the player is informed by means such as the third symbol display device 81, a sound device, or an LED. It may be controlled to notify in advance so that the ball is fired at 945.

The notification is changed depending on the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945, but in the first embodiment, it is easier for the ball to reach the electric accessory 640 if the ball is notified to suggest hitting to the right. Therefore, it is desirable.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, there is no difference in the ease with which the ball reaches the feather member 945 whether the ball is shot left-handed or right-handed, but in the sense that the ball continues to be shot from the left, It is preferable to inform in a way that suggests. Note that for players who play right-handed games from a normal state, the notification may be made with content that causes the firing to continue.

In the first embodiment, it is possible to win the special symbol 1 lottery by detecting the passing by the sensor SE, and by detecting the ball passing through the second prize opening 640 and by the switch on the downstream side. Although the case where it is possible to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when passing is detected by the sensor SE on the left side and when a ball is detected by the switch on the downstream side of the second prize opening 640, it is possible to win the special symbol 1 lottery, and when passing is detected by the sensor SE on the right side. It may also be possible to make it possible to obtain the special symbol 2 by lottery when the lottery is performed.

In this case, when the ball is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762, the player's profit is greater if the ball passes through the first ball throwing path KR1 while the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation operation (left and right tilting operation) of the seesaw member 762 is completed in a time shorter than 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating resistance may be increased by reducing the clearance of the rotating shaft portion, and the time required for rotating the seesaw member 762 may be set to 1.0 seconds or more. In this case, even if the first ball enters the first prize opening 64 consecutively, after the fluctuating display due to the detection of the ball in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 ends, the next ball enters the seesaw member. 762, it is possible to configure a game in which the player is swept to the left.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide portion 742 is disposed at the left-right center position of the flow path formed inside the upper protrusion portion 741, but the guide portion 742 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide portions 742 may be configured to be arranged side by side on the left and right. In this case, the mutually protruding tip surfaces are formed to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the opposing surfaces, so that they come into contact with the two guide portions 742 and are guided (back side). It is possible to effectively suppress the ball being folded back from being displaced in the left-right direction.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the bending member 740 are connected by a resin path, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the path for guiding the ball may be configured with nails. In this case, the falling speed of the balls can be varied.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 are formed as parallel linear grooves, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be formed with a curved path. In the case of curvature, the lower guide surface of the ball may be curved like a metal rail, or it may be curved in a meandering manner back and forth.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left guide part 645 is arranged on the front side of the covering plate part 711 when the movable plate member 641 is in the advanced state, and the ball can roll on the upper surface thereof. In this case, a protrusion may be provided on the front side of the covering plate portion 711 to extend in a direction intersecting the rolling path of the ball. Thereby, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the left guide portion 645 can be caused to collide with the protrusion, thereby decelerating the ball.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls swept to the right by the right guide section 643 are received by the second ball throwing section 736 without any leakage, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the right guide portion 643 may be formed to extend to a position above the second ball throwing portion 736, and the general winning hole 63 may be disposed on the right side of the second ball throwing portion 736.

In this case, if the movable plate member 641 changes to the retracted state at the timing when the ball is placed vertically above the second ball throwing section 736, the ball will be received by the second ball throwing section 736; If the movable plate member 641 is still maintained in the entering state at the timing when the ball is placed vertically above the ball 736, the ball passes through the second ball throwing section 736 to the right and is accepted into the general prize opening 63. .

That is, at the time when the ball is flown to the right side by the right guide section 643, it is not possible to determine whether the ball is guided to the second ball throwing section 736 or to the general prize opening 63, thereby improving the attention to the ball. can be done.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the jackpot type is controlled by one, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of operation patterns are preset corresponding to the jackpot type, and when a ball passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 is detected, which operation pattern will be controlled is selected based on the probability. The operation of the electric accessory 640a may be performed in a different operation pattern.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the high probability state is set to the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to include a case where the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the high probability state becomes the fourth operation pattern. In this case, it can be made difficult to determine whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 flows downstream via the seesaw member 762, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the seesaw member 762 and the left flow path may be omitted. That is, the flow path may be formed only from the first prize opening 64 and the right side path.

In this case, it will be difficult to exclude cases in which multiple balls enter the ball, but for example, if there is a rotating body that rotates at a constant speed with a rotation axis in the front and back direction on the downstream path from the center frame 86 to the first winning hole 64. A rotating body is provided with a concave portion capable of accommodating a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumferential circle, and the ball accommodated in the concave portion is moved above the first prize opening 64 by rotation of the rotary body. By configuring the ball to be accepted into the first winning hole 64 only when the ball reaches the first winning hole 64, it is possible to prevent multiple balls from entering the first winning hole 64.

That is, since the rotating body can prevent the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 at any timing, the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be defined by the rotational speed of the rotating body.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the first prize opening 64 rides on the right guide section 643 and flows down to the side opposite to the left guide section 645, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the slope of the right guide part 643 is configured to be downwardly inclined toward the left guide part 645, and the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 flows from the right guide part 643 to the left guide part 645, and the first ball is thrown. It may also be configured to be guided by the section 734.

In this case, when the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the advanced state for a sufficiently long time, the ball placed on the first ball throwing path KR1 can be guided to the first ball throwing section 734, and the lottery of special symbol 2 can be performed. can be obtained.

On the other hand, if the moving plate member 641 enters for a short period of time, the ball will fall between the first ball throwing section 734 and the bending member 740, but by receiving the ball at this position, the player can A receiving port may be provided that provides a predetermined benefit.

The profit when a ball enters the receiving hole may be the payout of the prize ball, the drawing of special symbols 1 or 2, the drawing of normal symbols, or the falling lottery (from high probability state). It may be a lottery (lottery that changes the gaming state to a low probability state), or it may be any other profit. In any case, attention to the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 can be improved.

It should be noted that the plate may be extended so as to be upwardly inclined to the right side from the right end of the right side guide portion 643, so that a falling ball can be received on the right side of the bending member 740. In this case, if the configuration is such that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 from the right side of the bending member 740 reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, the state in which the ball is arranged on the first ball throwing path KR1 By operating the movable plate member 641 to be in the retracted state, the ball falls on the first ball throwing route KR1 and is detected by the sensor SE, making it possible to win the special symbol 1 lottery.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 is arranged on the left side of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the normal winning a prize opening (through gate) 66 arranged on the left side may be omitted. In this case, the normal winning slot (through gate) 765 is the only place where you can win a lottery with a normal symbol when you hit the left hand, and the normal winning slot (through gate) 67,765 where you can win a lottery with a normal symbol when you hit the right. be done.

That is, by firing the ball with left-handed hitting, the operation of the electric accessory 640a can be limited to the operation by drawing a normal symbol at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, so the first operation pattern or the first operation pattern When the electric accessory 640a operates in the second operation pattern, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the electric accessory 640a is not guided by the right guide portion 643 and is detected by the sensor SE.

On the other hand, if the ball is fired right-handed, it is easier to win the lottery with normal symbols, so it is easier to increase gaming efficiency. In other words, the player can play the game in such a way that it is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is detected by the sensor SE, although the playing efficiency is reduced, or the player can play the game in such a way that the game efficiency is increased but there is a possibility that the ball will be detected by the sensor SE. You can choose to play a game that increases the amount slightly, or choose according to your preference.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable plate member 641 extends to the outside of the bending member 740, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the left guide portion 645 may be omitted. In this case, the second ball throwing section 736 may function as the second winning hole 640.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball is guided to the right guide portion 643 from the path formed by the distribution member 760, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be guided from the front side of the base plate 60 to the right guide portion 643. In this case, a plate part is extended to the left side at the same slope from the left end of the right guide part 643, and the left side surface of the bending member 740 is arranged so that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate part can enter the inside of the bending member 740. An opening may be formed in the opening.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the paths of balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 in different left and right directions merge on the downstream side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a detection device for detecting passage of a ball may be disposed on the lower end side of the first inclined groove 755, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be obtained when the ball is detected by the detection device. A detection device for detecting the passing of a ball may be disposed behind the second ball throwing section 736, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be obtained when the ball is detected by the detection device.

That is, by omitting the formation of the second inclined groove 757, etc., the position for detecting the ball rolling on the upper surface of the left guide part 645 and the position for detecting the ball rolling on the upper surface of the right guide part 643 can be changed. They may be provided separately.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the paths of the balls that have rolled on the upper surface of the wing member 945 at different positions in the front and back merge on the downstream side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passage hole is formed at the rear of the third branch passage BK3, a detection device is disposed on the downstream side of the hole, and the detection device detects the passage of the ball, thereby creating a special It may also be possible to obtain the symbol 2 lottery.

That is, by omitting the formation of the ball-throwing hole 941k and the ball-throwing opening 982k, etc., there is a position where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the wing-like main body 945m is detected, and a position where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e is detected. and may be provided separately.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-like portion 945e is connected and fixed to the wing-like main body 945m on the rotating tip side of the wing member 945, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extending portion 945d may be formed on the rotational base end side of the wing member 945, or may be formed at an intermediate position in the rotational radial direction. In particular, when formed on the rotation base end side of the extension portion 945d, the formation width of the fourth through hole 941j and the rotation permissible opening 982m can be made small, and the back base 941 and bulge caused by the hole formation can be reduced. Deterioration in the strength of the portion 982 can be minimized.

Note that when a ball rides on the plate-like portion 945e, the plate-like portion 945e may be bent and deformed starting from the extended portion 945d; In this case, an elastic force generated when the plate-shaped portion 945e elastically recovers from the bending deformation is generated in a direction that pushes the ball into the third branch passage BK3 side. Thereby, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e can be stably guided to the third branch passage BK3 side.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e are formed on both of the pair of wing members 945, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e may be formed only on one wing member 945.

In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rolling surface of the wing-like main body 945m and the rolling surface of the plate-like portion 945e are formed by the same inclined surface when the wing member 945 is in the open state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 945e may be shallower (the angle with the horizontal is smaller) than the inclination angle of the wing-like main body 945m.

In this case, the speed of the ball rolling on the wing-shaped main body 945m can be made faster than the speed of the ball rolling on the plate-like portion 945e. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the balls arranged in front and behind are maintained in an overlapping state when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, when one ball is placed on the plate-like portion 945e, the motion resistance applied from the ball to the feather member 945 is greater than when one ball is placed on the feather-like main body 945m. Thus, the operating speed of the wing member 945 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case where the wing member 945 is configured to appear and retract by sliding in the front-rear direction, the inclination angle of the wing-like main body 945m and the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 945e may be similarly made different. In this case, even if the ball rides on the plate-like part 945e and the feather-like main body 945m at the same time, depending on the operating length of the wing member 945, the ball may roll on one of the plate-like part 945e or the feather-like main body 945m. A state can be created in which the balls rolling on the other side of the plate-shaped portion 945e or the wing-shaped main body 945m fall before reaching the rolling plate portion 941l.

In the second embodiment, the extension portion 945d is extended from near the top surface of the feather body 945m in the open state of the feather member 945, so that the top surface of the feather body 945m and the top surface of the plate portion 945e are arranged in front and back. Although a case has been described in which they appear to overlap, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e and the upper surface of the wing-shaped main body 945m may be formed to be vertically shifted from each other. In this case, even if a ball is placed on the wing-shaped body 945m while the ball is placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, there is a shift in the vertical position, so the ball on the front side completely hides the ball on the rear side. can be easily avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-like portions 945e are formed in bilaterally symmetrical positions, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the wing-like main body 945m may be configured to have a symmetrical shape, but the plate-like portion 945e on the right side may be arranged higher than the plate-like portion 945e on the left side (arranged asymmetrically). . In this case, while maintaining the appearance of the wing-like main body 945m that is easy to see from the front, it is left-right symmetrical, while the falling path of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 945e arranged on the back side is made left-right asymmetrical. I can do it. Thereby, when the ball arrives on the line of symmetry, the loads in the left and right directions are balanced, making it easier to avoid a situation where the ball gets jammed.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the operating resistance of the distribution section 983 is designed using the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c to define the shortest distance between the balls, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, on the flow path from the center frame 86 to the first prize opening 64, there is a recessed part that is a rotary body that rotates at a constant speed about a rotation axis in the front and back direction and can accommodate a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumference. A rotating body may also be provided. In this case, by configuring the ball accommodated in the concave portion to be received in the first winning hole 64 only when the ball reaches above the first winning hole 64 due to the rotation of the rotating body, the first winning hole can be received. It is possible to prevent consecutive balls from entering the mouth 64.

That is, since the rotating body can prevent the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 at any timing, the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be defined by the rotational speed of the rotating body.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slope 4645a of the upstream guide section 4645 and the slope 643a of the right guide section 643 have the same slope, but this is not necessarily the case.

For example, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 4645a may be larger than the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, the acceleration of the ball rolling on the inclined surface 4645a to the right can be increased, so even if the electric accessory 4640a is in the retracted state while the ball is placed on the first ball throwing path KR1. It is also possible to create a state in which the ball also flows toward the second ball throwing section 736 due to momentum. That is, by increasing the acceleration in the right direction, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down into the recovery hole 752. In this sense, compared to the ball that entered the first winning hole 64, the ball that rolls down the slope 4645a can enter the second ball throwing section 736 more easily.

Further, for example, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 4645a may be smaller than the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, since the time the ball stays on the inclined surface 643a can be extended, the electric accessory 4640a changes to the retracted state when the ball is placed on the first ball throwing path KR1, and the ball goes into the recovery hole 755. This makes it more likely that the water will flow down to the ground.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Configuration to reduce wasted balls>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. In a gaming machine comprising a detection means and an operation means whose operation is controlled in a predetermined pattern based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, the game ball that has passed through the detection means is brought to the operation means. A game machine A1 characterized by comprising a guide means for guiding along a predetermined route.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a movable accessory that opens and closes after a predetermined period of time has passed after detecting passage of a game ball in a detection area (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-000562) . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the falling path of the game ball that has passed through the detection area flows down in multiple ways. Since the cases where the game balls are picked up by the movable accessory and the cases where they fall from the movable accessory will occur randomly, if there are many game balls that fall from the movable accessory, the player will have to adjust the game machine store to be disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem in that it is easy for players to misunderstand that they are playing games, and they may feel dissatisfied with the fact that they are not able to play games in an equal environment.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the game ball flows down after passing the detection means is not random, but the game ball is guided to the operating means by the guide means, so that the game ball that has passed the detection means The player can be made to understand that the difference between whether the prize is picked up by the operating means or spilled from the operating means is due to action control (control based on the success or failure of a lottery conducted in advance at the time of winning). In other words, it can be understood that the pattern of operation control of the operating means is set based on the flow time specified by the configuration of the guiding means, and is not based on adjustments by the gaming machine store. It can make you feel like you are playing in an environment.

Note that the gaming area refers to the area where the gaming ball flows down until the profit given to the player by the falling gaming ball is determined, and is not limited to the area on the front side of the gaming board, for example. For example, a flow path formed upstream of a detection device that draws the first symbol by detecting passage of a game ball, and a flow path provided inside a game board or on the back side of the game board. Roads are also included in the gaming area.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, wherein the guide means is disposed so as to pass through the back side of the gaming area.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the game balls guided by the guide means can be hidden by the game balls flowing down in the game area, so that attention is paid to the area from the guide means to the operating means. You can improve your strength.

A game machine A3 in the game machine A2, wherein the game ball guided by the guide means flows down within a predetermined range toward the front side of the game board constituting the game area.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, since the gaming balls guided by the guide means flow down to the front side of the gaming board, the players can visually perceive the gaming balls as if they are approaching. I can do it. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide means can be made to stand out in comparison with the normal game ball that only flows downward.

Game machine A4, characterized in that in any of game machines A1 to A3, the guide means is configured to be able to manage the time required for the game ball to flow down from the detection means to the operation means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A3, it is possible to easily set the operation control of a pattern in which a game ball is picked up by the operating means and the operation control in a pattern of dropping it. .

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the operating means is configured to guide the game ball in a rolling manner in a closed state or an open state, and the width dimension of the game ball in the downstream direction is the same as that of the game ball. A gaming machine A5 comprising a first operating part set to be twice the diameter or less, and a game ball guided by the guide means is guided to the first operating part.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first operating section can shorten the time for the game ball to be guided to the operating means, and the operating means can guide the game ball to the operating means. can be guided one ball at a time. The width of the operating means can be shortened.

In the game machine A5, the operating means includes a second operating section that is longer than the first operating section, and the game ball moves in the second operating section longer than the period required for the gaming ball to roll through the first operating section. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the period required for rolling the parts is longer.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, as a guiding mode of the game ball that has reached the operating means, when the operating means are operating in the same operation pattern, the game ball is guided in the first direction. Depending on whether the ball reaches the operating section or the second operating section, it is possible to change how the game ball flows downstream.

In the gaming machine A6, a gaming ball guided to the first operating section and a gaming ball guided to the second operating section are guided to different downstream areas.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A6, the guidance direction of the ball can be configured in a plurality of directions using one operating means, so that the appearance when guiding the game ball by the operating means is improved. can be realized in multiple ways.

In the game machine A7, the game ball that has passed through the detection means is configured to be guided to the first operating section, and the game ball that has flown down without passing through the detection means is guided to the second operating section. A game machine A8 characterized by:

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A7, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed the detection means from being bounced by other game balls and causing poor guidance.

In any of the game machines A6 to A8, the game ball guided to the first operating section and the game ball guided to the second operating section are characterized in that collision on the operating means is suppressed. A gaming machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines A6 to A8, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of non-uniformity in the flow pattern due to collision of the game balls rolling on the operating means. can.

Note that a wall may be placed between the game balls placed on the first operating section and the game balls placed on the second operating section to isolate them, or even if there is no wall, they will not collide. It may also be managed in such a way that it does not flow down.

In the gaming machine A9, the gaming ball guided to the first operating section flows down in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the gaming ball guided to the second operating section.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, unlike the case where the game ball guided to the first operating section and the gaming ball guided to the second operating section flow down in the same direction, Collision between game balls can be avoided regardless of the falling speed of the game balls.

Note that the downward direction of the game ball may be reversed left and right, or reversed front and back. Alternatively, the direction may be in the opposite direction along a predetermined locus (for example, a circular locus).

A gaming machine A11 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, wherein the guide means includes a plurality of routes as the predetermined route.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A10, it is possible to increase the number of falling patterns of game balls while reducing the number of types of operation patterns of the operation means.

<Sensor is placed on the path of 8 chances and pulls the ball from the disadvantageous side to the advantageous side>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area configuring means that forms a gaming area in which the game balls fired by the game ball launching device flow down, a configuring device that configures a falling path for the game balls, and the configuration thereof. A first path, which is arranged downstream of the means, in which the game ball is guided to the first ball entry port, and a second path, which is arranged in the downstream side of the constituent means, in which the game ball is guided to the second ball entry port. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a moving means for moving a game ball flowing down the first route toward the second route.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the route that the gaming balls take periodically changes depending on the order in which the gaming balls pass through the ball entrance (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the advantages and disadvantages of the ball entering the ball opening only change depending on the period in which the game ball enters the ball. There was a problem in that it was difficult to form. In other words, there was a problem in that the range of change in the player's advantage degree was limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the moving means determines whether the game ball that has flown down the path configured by the component means enters the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. Since it can be caused to occur randomly, the range of change in the degree of advantage for the player can be expanded compared to a case where the ball entrance into which the game ball enters changes periodically.

In gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the route configured by the configuration means is a branch route.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, not only the movement of the game ball changes due to the action of the moving means, but also the flowing pattern of the game ball changes due to the branching of the path. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball that has entered the component means.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a detection means configured to be able to detect passage of a game ball flowing down the route, and the moving means is operable in a manner that affects the flow of the game ball within the route. The operating means is configured such that in the first state, the game ball is thrown toward the first ball entry port, and in the second state, the game ball is thrown toward the second ball entry port. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is configured so that the ball is thrown, and that the operation can be controlled based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, depending on the operation pattern of the operating means, the game ball that enters the constituent means either enters the first ball entrance or enters the second ball entrance. Since it is possible to switch whether the ball enters the mouth or not, it is possible to easily reduce the periodicity of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters. This makes it possible to widen the range of change in the player's advantage compared to the case where the ball entrance into which the game ball enters changes periodically.

In the gaming machine B3, the operating means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down the outside of the constituent means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, there is a means for guiding the game ball flowing down the flow path configured in the component means, and a means for guiding the game ball flowing down outside the flow path configured in the component means. The operating means can serve as both the guiding means and the guiding means.

The gaming machine B3 or B4 is provided with a second detection means disposed outside the path of the component means, and includes a mode of guiding a game ball that has passed through the detection means to the operating means, and a second detection means. A game machine B5 characterized in that the manner in which the passing game ball is guided to the operating means is different.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of guidance modes for the operating means.

Note that the difference in the guidance mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a difference in the path of the game ball, or a difference in the falling speed of the game ball.

In any of the game machines B3 to B5, the operating means changes the downward direction of the game ball between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by switching between the first state and the second state. Machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the change in the downward direction of the game ball.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B6, the detection means is controlled so that a predetermined symbol changes for a predetermined period based on the passing of the game ball, and during the predetermined period, the game ball enters the path. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the period is set to be shorter than the period required for passing through the detection means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, by maintaining the state in which the number of gaming balls arranged between the entrance of the path of the component means and the detection means is one or less, , it is possible to avoid a situation where the symbols are changing at the time the game ball passes through the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to start changing the predetermined symbols immediately after the game ball passes through the detection means.

Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes through the detection means can be matched with the timing at which the operation control of the operation means based on the game ball passing through the detection means is started.

In the gaming machine B7, the operating means has two control modes: a first control mode in which the game ball detected by the detection device is not guided, and a second control mode in which the game ball detected by the detection device is guided. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is switchable.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B7, even if the operation of the operating means is executed, there are cases where the game ball is guided by the operating means and cases where it is not guided due to the difference in control mode. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operation means.

In the gaming machine B8, switching of the control mode is configured to be executable each time detection is made by the detection means, and the type of the control mode that can be switched is configured to be changeable each time a jackpot game is played. Characteristic game machine B9.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B9, the player receives a profit when the game ball enters the first ball entry port, and a player receives a profit when the game ball enters the second ball entry port. A gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the profits obtained are different from the profits obtained.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B9, it is possible to improve attention to the operating means.

<Configuration that flows down to the operating means at multiple positions>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. In a gaming machine comprising a detection means and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, the operation means has a first downstream position where the game ball can flow down. , and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, such that the downstream manner of the game ball flowing down the first downstream position is different from the downstream manner of the game ball flowing down the second downstream position. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being configured.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a movable accessory is released based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, and the game ball is guided to the winning hole by the movable accessory (for example, a special game machine). (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the manner in which the game ball is guided by the movable accessory is monotonous, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the attention of the movable accessory.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the operating means is provided with a plurality of downstream positions for causing the game ball to flow down, and the downstream mode is configured to differ depending on which downstream position the game ball flows down. Variations can be provided in the manner in which the game ball is guided by the movable accessory, and the attention of the movable accessory can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the flow mode is a flow speed, a flow direction, or a flow interval of the game ball.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, it is possible to vary the flow of the game balls flowing down along the operating means, and it is possible to improve the attention to the game balls.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the first downstream position is set as a position where the gaming ball that has passed the detection means can flow down.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, by confirming that the gaming ball has reached the first downstream position, it is possible to know that the gaming ball has passed the detection means. , it is possible to eliminate the need to visually recognize the detection means.

In addition, by making the game balls that have passed through the detection means and the game balls that have not passed through the detection means flow down at different positions on the operating means, the number of game balls that can be placed on the operating means at the same time can be increased. This can be changed depending on whether the firing mode is aimed so that all the balls pass through the detection means, or the firing mode is aimed so that some of the game balls miss the detection means.

In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the downstream path of the gaming ball that has passed through the detection means is configured as a non-branching path.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, by confirming that the gaming ball has reached the first downstream position, it is possible to understand that the gaming ball has passed the detection means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the downstream path of the game ball that has flown down the first downstream position and the downstream path of the game ball that has flown down the second downstream position are defined by a predetermined path on the downstream side of the operating means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by merging at a merging position.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C4, the profit obtained by the game ball caused by the game ball flown down by the operating means can be made the same regardless of the position of the game ball. .

In the gaming machine C5, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the merging position is located at a position away from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load generated by the gaming balls at the time of merging on the operation of the operating means. Thereby, the operation of the operating means can be executed smoothly.

In the gaming machine C5, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the merging position is located close to the operating means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C5, the detection device that detects the passage of the game ball flowing down along the operating means can be placed further upstream, so that profits can be generated early. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the waiting time from when the game ball flows down along the operating means to when a profit is generated.

A game machine C8, which is any one of the game machines C5 to C7, and is configured such that the game balls fall downward at the merging position.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, it is possible to avoid situations such as balls flowing backward after merging or balls clogging.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a game characterized in that the game balls flowing down the first downstream position and the game balls flowing down the second downstream position are configured to have the same flowing direction. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C8, it is possible to unify the side that focuses on the game balls that have reached the operating means, so that it is easy for the player to focus on the points to be focused on. You can make them understand.

A game characterized in that, in any of the game machines C1 to C8, the game balls flowing down the first downstream position and the game balls flowing down the second downstream position are configured to flow in different directions. Machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, by visually confirming the direction in which the gaming ball flows down, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball has flown down the first downstream position or whether the gaming ball has flown down the second downstream position. Since it is possible to judge whether or not the downstream position has flown down, the downstream direction of the game ball can be grasped on the downstream side of the operating means even in a configuration where the game balls placed close to the operating means overlap in front and behind and are difficult to see. I can do it.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, a first ball entrance is configured to be able to provide a first profit to a player when a game ball enters, and a first ball entrance that is configured to provide a first profit to a player when a game ball enters the game machine. a second ball entry port configured to be capable of imparting a second profit larger than the first profit, the first downstream position being a falling path of a game ball that has entered the first ball entry port; A gaming machine C11, wherein the operating means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down the first downstream position toward the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the operating means causes the gaming ball that enters the first ball entrance to be turned into the first ball before a profit is awarded. 2. Can be pulled out to the ball entrance side.

As a result, for example, a gaming machine with a horizontally symmetrical board (the winning slots for special symbol drawings and the winning slots that open and close during special games are arranged vertically in the center of the left and right, and you can hit the winning slots with your left hand or right hand). Even if the game machine has a board structure that allows the player to enter the ball by hitting the ball, the frequency with which profits are generated by entering the ball into the first ball entry port can be reduced by operating the operating means.

Therefore, in order to reduce the frequency of balls entering the first ball entrance, it is possible to reduce the need to configure a right-handed hitting path in which the game ball is not guided to the first ball entrance, improving the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area. can be done.

<Advantages and disadvantages of the first flow path and the second flow path that are branched by the branching means can be changed>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area forming means that forms a gaming area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow, and a first channel and a first flow path downstream of a predetermined ball entry area. configuring means for configuring a second flow path, a first profit obtained by the player when a game ball flows down the first flow path, and a first profit obtained by the player when the game ball flows down the second flow path. A gaming machine D1 is provided with a changing means configured to be able to change the magnitude relationship between the second profit obtained by the player and the second profit obtained by the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a difference in the profit that a player is expected to gain depending on whether a game ball that has flown down a predetermined ball entry area flows down to the left side or to the right side. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the advantageous direction when the game ball falls is fixed, so if you can confirm the direction of the game ball flowing down at the branching position, you can predict the profit that will be obtained after that, and it is difficult to actually Since the player's concentration peaks before the game ball reaches the fixed area where the profit is fixed, the player's attention to the route from the branch position to the fixed area decreases, making it difficult to direct the gaming area. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the perspective of using it as an area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the magnitude relationship between the first profit and the second profit can be switched by the changing means, so that the game ball can reach the peak of the player's concentration. Since the game ball can be brought to the determined area where the profit is actually determined, rather than at the time when the ball enters the first channel or the second channel, it is possible to bring the ball to the determined area where the profit is actually determined, Able to maintain high attention. Thereby, the game area can be effectively used as a performance area.

Note that the time point at which profits are determined is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be the time when the game ball passes the detection port (detection area, specific area, etc.), or the time when the player is notified of the profit determined by the game ball passing the detection port (the time when the player (when profits can be recognized).

The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it includes a downstream region that causes the game ball to flow down toward the front side when the larger of the first benefit or the second benefit is awarded to the player. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, a larger profit is given to the player when the game ball differs from the normal falling pattern (flowing downward), so that the game By making the ball visible, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a larger profit has been awarded.

A gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the first flow path and the second flow path are configured to be able to merge, and there is a vertical positional difference in the approach position to the merged position.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, even if the game balls enter the merging position from the first flow path and the second flow path at the same time, the load at the time of collision is lower and lower. Since this occurs in the direction (direction that intersects the first flow path and the second flow path), it is possible to easily avoid the game balls from flowing backward.

In the gaming machine D3, a gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in the entry position, the side where the game ball passes more frequently is disposed on the lower side.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, it is possible to easily prevent game balls that frequently pass through a predetermined entry position from accidentally entering other entry positions.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the first flow path and the second flow path include a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball, and a detection means based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means. an operating means whose operation is controlled in a predetermined pattern, an interval between the detecting means and the operating means in the first flow path, and an interval between the detecting means and the operating means in the second flow path, A gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is configured such that the numbers are different from each other.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation control of the operating means is the same, but the game ball flows down the first flow path, and the second flow path is used for the game. Whether or not the operating means acts on the game ball can be made different depending on whether the ball is flowing down or not.

<Switch in 3 states>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow down, and a configuration that allows the game balls that have flown down the game area to enter. a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance; a detection means arranged in the gaming area for detecting passage of a game ball; and an operation based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means; A gaming machine comprising: a first state in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry port; and a first state in which the game ball enters the second ball entry port, depending on the operating mode of the operating device. A game machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to switch between a second state in which the game ball is easy to hit and a third state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a first starting port and a second starting port (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a state in which the ball easily enters the first starting port and the second starting port (first and second starting port), and only the second starting port (second second starting port). The problem is that although it is possible to switch between the states where it is easy for the ball to enter and the state where it is easy to enter the ball, it is not possible to switch to the state where it is easy for the ball to enter only the first starting port, which limits the degree of freedom in how the ball enters the game ball. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, there is a third state in which the ball easily enters the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, and a third state in which the ball enters the second ball entry port, depending on the operating mode of the operating means. Since the state can be switched not only to the second state where it is easy to enter the ball, but also to the first state where it is easy to enter the first ball entry hole, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the manner in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance.

In the gaming machine E1, in the third state, the falling game ball alternately enters the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port. Machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, it is possible to equalize the number of balls entering the first ball entry port and the number of balls entering the second ball entry port in the third state.

A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine E1 or E2 is provided with a predetermined flow path formed so that a game ball flowing down can enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E1 or E2, at the time when the game ball is flowing down the predetermined flow path, the possibility that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance port is also lower than the first ball. Since there is still a possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entrance, attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined channel can be improved.

<You can accumulate both special 1 and special 2 with support>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow down, and a configuration that allows the game balls that have flown down the game area to enter. a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance; a detection means arranged in the gaming area for detecting passage of a game ball; and an operation based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means; A gaming machine comprising a controlled operating means, wherein the operating means follows a flowing path of the game ball that has flowed down to the position where the operating means is disposed, and a first path toward the first ball entry port; A gaming machine F1 that is configured to be able to branch into a second route toward the second ball entrance side and another route.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a first starting port and a second starting port (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port (second starting port) when the movable piece is in the open state, but the ball enters the first starting port. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to create a state in which the ball was easily played, and there was room for improvement in the manner in which the game ball was guided by the movable piece.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first path and the second path are formed as downstream paths from the operating means, so that it is possible to guide the game ball to the first ball entrance. Since the game ball can also be guided to the second ball entrance, the manner in which the game ball is guided by the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the profit that can be awarded to the player when a game ball enters the second ball entrance is greater than the profit that can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first ball entrance. A large profit is set, and the first ball entry port is arranged below the center side of the operating means, and the second ball entry port is arranged below the end side of the operating means. Game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F1, once the game ball has flown to the end side of the operating means, it can enter the second ball entrance, so that the ball will fall in the middle position (timely operation). By operating the means), it is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry port than a situation in which the ball enters the first ball entry port.

A gaming machine F3, which is the gaming machine F1 or F2, and includes a spill prevention means for preventing game balls from spilling from the end of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the spill prevention means can prevent the game ball from spilling from the operating means due to excessive force, so that when the gaming ball reaches the operating means, The player's sense of security can be increased.

In addition, by allowing the game ball to bounce back with high repulsion using the spill prevention means, it is possible to increase the rolling speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the operating means and to make it easier for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the operating means in a short time. can.

<Different configurations for left and right distribution>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. a plurality of detection means, an operating means that operates based on the detection of passing of a game ball by the detection means, and a guided ball entrance configured to allow the game ball guided by the operating means to enter. In the gaming machine, the plurality of detection means include a first detection means disposed upstream of the operating means, and a second detection means disposed at a different position from the first detection means. A gaming machine G1 comprising:

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a normal figure starting opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-54970). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the route guided to the normal figure starting port and the route guided to the opening/closing member side are separate routes, and the game balls flow down the respective routes alternately. If a game ball collides with the nail placed directly above the starting hole of a regular game and deviates from the starting hole of the regular game, there will be a period of time before the game ball is guided to the starting hole of the regular game. Therefore, when the opening/closing member is closed, the game balls tend to flow down to the opening/closing member side, which tends to lead to a situation where expectations are low. In this case, there is a problem in that the game may be delayed, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, the gaming machine G1 includes a first detection means disposed upstream of the operating means and a second detection means disposed at a position different from the upstream side of the operating means. , it is possible to frequently cause a situation in which the game ball is detected by the detection means. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of operation of the operating means, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine G2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1, a predetermined flow path is formed between the first detection means and the operating means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to rectify the flow of gaming balls from the first detection means to the operating means.

A gaming machine G3 in the gaming machine G1 or G2, wherein the operating means is formed so as to extend toward the downstream path of the game ball passing through the second detection means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1 or G2, it is possible to prevent the attention power on the second detection means side from becoming too low in comparison with the attention power on the first detection means side.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine Z3 characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base board (part of the gaming area configuration means)
67 Normal prize opening (detection means, second detection means)
112a Ball launching unit (game ball launching device)
640 2nd prize opening (2nd ball entrance)
640a Electric accessory (operation means)
643 Right side guide section (first operating section, first downstream position)
645 Left side guide section (second operating section, second downstream position)
700 Route configuration device (part of gaming area configuration means)
734 First ball throwing part (spill prevention means)
736a Ball passage hole (guided ball entrance)
740 Bending member (part of guide means)
750 Intervening member (part of guide means)
760 Sorting member (part of guiding means)
765 Normal winning opening (detection means, first detection means)
930 Winning opening unit (part of gaming area configuration means)
945 Wing member (moving means, operating means)
945e Plate-shaped part (part of operating means, first downstream position)
945m Feathered body (part of the operating means, second downstream position)
980 Sorting unit (part of the gaming area configuration means, part of the configuration means)
3765 Normal winning opening (detection means, second detection means)
BK3 3rd branch passage (part of 2nd route)
SE3 Detection device (first ball entrance)
SE4, SE5 Detection device (detection means)
SE6 Detection device (second ball entrance)
TR1 1st passage (part of 1st route)
TR2 2nd passage (part of the 1st route)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable accessory is opened based on the detection of a game ball by a detection means, and the movable accessory guides the game ball to a winning hole (Patent Document 1) ).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the attention of the movable accessory. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the attention of movable accessories.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 includes a game ball firing device that fires game balls, and a game area forming means that forms a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball firing device flow down. A gaming machine comprising: a detection means disposed in the gaming area for detecting the passage of a game ball; and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means. The operating means includes a first downstream position where the game ball can flow down, and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, and the operating means has a flow mode in which the game ball flows down the first downstream position. The game ball is configured to flow down the second downstream position in a manner different from that of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve the attention of the movable accessory.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the route configuration device. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the route configuring device. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the path configuration device taken along line VIIa-VIIa in FIG. 6. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; (a) and (b) are partial front views of the route construction device in range VIIIa of FIG. 6; 3 is a partial front view of the game board in range XII of FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball in a normal winning opening (through gate) and time-measured changes in the state of an electric accessory. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in a 2nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 19(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball by the detection device and time-measured changes in the state of the wing member. It is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 16(a). (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit and the throwing ball unit taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23. It is a partial front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partial front view of the game board in 4th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 14, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is configured by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral part thereof is the inner frame 12. (See Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

Note that the structure of the base plate 60 is not limited to resin material. For example, the base board 60 may be made of wood made of thin plates pasted together, and may be formed so that the various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base board 60 cannot be visually seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a region in which prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

Note that the above-mentioned gaming area is interpreted in a narrow sense, and in a broader sense, the gaming area may be expressed as the area where the gaming ball falls until the profit given to the player by the falling gaming ball is determined. In this sense, the gaming area is not limited to the area on the front side of the gaming board 13. For example, a route arranged upstream of sensor SE, which will be described later, is also included in the game area.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

The lottery based on winnings will be explained in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, winnings are made to the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 (some kind of benefit to the player (for example, paying out prize balls, executing a lottery, moving to a more advantageous state) A special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when there is a ball that can be expected to be awarded a profit, etc.), and the ball is drawn into the regular prize openings 66, 67 (or the regular prize openings (through gate) described later). )765), a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery conducted for balls entering the first prize opening 64 and the second prize opening 640, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the type of jackpot is also determined.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the special symbol's high probability state (also referred to as the special symbol's probability variable state), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, a special symbol lottery that is performed when a game ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is detected by a sensor SE, which will be described later, will be referred to as a "special symbol 1 lottery", and the second winning hole 640 A special symbol lottery that is performed when a game ball that has entered the game ball is detected by a sensor (not shown) on the downstream side is referred to as a "special symbol 2 lottery."

When a special symbol hits the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the special prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, opens for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls (the specified number) ) The opening action will be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds) until a prize is won. As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out. It should be noted that the fact that prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a and the number of prize balls to be paid out will be described later.

There are six special symbol jackpot types: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c". Although details will be described later, the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a after the end of the special game are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating this will be stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 while a variable display is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls entering the ball will be up to 4 for each type of winning hole. The number of balls reserved is shown on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning hole 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2) If the number of reserved balls remains, the next special symbol is drawn, and a variable display corresponding to the drawing is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both remain, a lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is executed preferentially.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 both remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is configured to be executed preferentially. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery may be executed preferentially in the order in which the special symbols are obtained (in the order in which the balls are entered), or the lottery may be executed alternately between the special symbols 1 and 2. Alternatively, the lottery may be executed using the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 at the same time.

In the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. become. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball becomes easier to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol.

Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or 1 second) has elapsed. Afterwards, a normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal winning hole 66, 67, 765 while the variable display is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes will be suspended up to 4 times, and the number of suspended balls will be displayed on the first symbol display. It is displayed by the device 37 and is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal winning slots 66, 67, 765, the next normal symbol lottery will be held, and the lottery according to the lottery will be held. Fluctuation display starts.

In this embodiment, as an added value after a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability changing) from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. (For example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a, jackpot b described later), and after the jackpot game, the time saving state of the normal symbol until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times (for example, as described later) Jackpot C, jackpot c) are available.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special symbol is given a variable probability state after the end of the special gaming state, a case has been described in which the variable probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot. For example, the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state until the 100th special symbol lottery is completed, and the special symbol is given a variable probability state (high probability state) after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. After that, the normal state may be set.

It should be noted that the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the probability variable state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the above-mentioned normal symbol becomes the time-saving state is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a state in which the probability is changing (probability changing).In other words, it is a state where the probability of a jackpot is changing (probability changing). This is a gaming state that is easy to transition to. In this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol (the probability of the special symbol is changing) includes a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change, but the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of special symbols" refers to a time when the probability of special symbols is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than when the probability of special symbols is changing.

In addition, the "time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving)" refers to a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbols does not change, but it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. In addition, the "normal state" refers to the state of the game where the probability of special symbols is not changing or the time of normal symbols is shortening (the jackpot probability and the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbol) have not changed, and the second prize opening 640 is not changed). This refers to a state in which the ball is not easy to land.

During the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and a longer time is set compared to the normal state. When the electric accessory 640a is in an excited state (excited state, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is placed at the front position and enters the first ball throwing path KR1), the electric accessory 640a is de-energized. The ball enters the second prize opening 640 compared to the case where it is in a retracted state (non-excited state, a state in which the moving plate member 641 described later is arranged at the rear position and retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1). becomes easier to win. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. That is, it becomes easier to draw special symbols.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is a hit may be increased compared to the normal state.

In addition, during the probability change of special symbols and the time saving of normal symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened, and the electric At least one of the opening times of the accessory 640a may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened will not be changed, and the normal symbol (the 2 symbols) may be configured to increase only the winning probability compared to the normal state.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

If a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. The number of balls is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of winning hole, and the number of reserved balls is shown on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, the sensor SE disposed downstream of the first winning hole 64 and the ball entering the second winning hole 640 are configured to be suspended up to four times each. The number of suspensions is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to a winning in either the sensor SE arranged downstream of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 4R normal jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "8R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after .

In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). Yes, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of

"Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a changes while the jackpot probability remains the same (or the second symbol This refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second prize opening 640 (increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol). On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is not changing in probability or shortening the game time (in a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the ease of winning a prize in the second prize opening 640 has been increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 640 more easily than when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area.

The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. A third symbol display device 81 is configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and a second symbol is displayed using the passage of the ball in the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED that variably displays the number of game balls, and a second symbol retention lamp 84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game balls have passed through the normal winning openings 66 and 67 by the lighting state. It is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this.

The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (the same main symbol A fluctuating display that finally stops when all the characters are aligned is performed, and after the fluctuating display ends, a jackpot occurs (transition to a special gaming state begins). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up (a variable display that finally stops in a state where they do not line up) is performed.

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a guaranteed variable jackpot, the main symbol with any number added from all the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers is A matching variation display is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, the display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to hit the ball toward the right path (channel) of the game board 13 will be explained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state, the game ball is more easily guided by the electric accessory 640a, so the game ball is easily guided by the electric accessory 640a. By launching the ball to the right side of the board 13 (hitting the ball to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. Further, although the details will be described later, if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) that is performed based on a ball entering the second prize hole 640, the ball will be entered into the first prize hole 64. Compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved by a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) based on the ball entering the ball, it is more likely to become a jackpot where the maximum number of prize balls can be obtained (jackpot a, b, c). .

Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols awarded after the end of the jackpot or the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right hit. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the variable probability state or the normal symbol is set to the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to enter the second winning hole 640 unless the player hits the ball with the right hand. The player will not be able to fully benefit from the variable probability state and the time-saving state of normal symbols.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (right hit navigation) in the variable probability state of special symbols or the time saving state of normal symbols, the player can The structure is designed to ensure that the benefits of this will be obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the text "Aim to the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the text. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably obtain benefits due to the variable probability state of the special symbols and the shortened time state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. This warning image indicates that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (hitting the ball to the right). This is an image (a right-handed warning image) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player is hit. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in a normal state (a state that is neither a special symbol probability changing state nor a normal symbol time saving state).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to make it difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in the normal state (even if you hit right, the ball will not be guided to the second winning hole 640). (difficult to ball). For this reason, if you hit the ball right-handed in the normal state, you will have fewer chances to receive a special symbol lottery than if you hit the ball left-handed and aim at the first prize opening 64. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it becomes difficult to hit the jackpot, resulting in a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed hitting warning image and encouraging left-handed hitting, the player is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from making a loss.

If it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the third symbol display device 81 will display the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" The characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not play right-handed (he should play left-handed). Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed hitting warning screen, the clerk at the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is playing an irregular game method of playing right-handed in the normal state.

In this embodiment, as a method for determining whether or not the player is hitting right-handed, the ball enters a normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can enter if the ball is hitting right-handed. Judging by whether or not it was done.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that a ball enters the normal winning hole (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed hit warning image is displayed. It is not limited to. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), if it is detected that a ball has won (ball entered) into the specific winning hole 65a, an illegal game (not limited to a right-handed game), for example, a variable winning device It may be configured to determine that a game mode (including a game mode in which a game ball is forced into the game ball by applying a load to the game ball 65 to open the specific prize opening 65a and forcing the game ball to enter the game ball) is being performed, and a right-handed hitting warning image is displayed. . As a result, the clerk at the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed player warning image.

For example, when it is detected that a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in a state other than the special gaming state (jackpot state), a signal indicating that fraud is being committed is sent to the hall computer. It may also be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that fraud is being committed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud is being committed.

Further, for example, by narrowing the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80, a range through which the game balls are forced to pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game balls is arranged in this range. You can do it like this. In this case, based on the fact that the detection sensor detects the passing of the game ball, it can be determined that the ball is being hit to the right.

Furthermore, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) disposed to the left of the top position of the variable display unit 80 (corresponding to the left-right center position in FIG. 2) may be provided. good. In this case, when the game ball is being launched, it can be determined that the game ball is being hit to the right based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device 65 will be explained. Here, an example of an abnormality in the variable winning device 65 is a case where a ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is detected even though it is not in a special gaming state (jackpot state).

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device 65, the word "warning" is displayed in large letters in the center of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the words "Please call the gate error staff" are displayed at the bottom of the screen. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can quickly request a repair or the like from a parlor clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 predetermines the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbols) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. This is a variable display that lights up alternately over time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is moved to a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for only a certain amount of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that it is shorter when the probability of the special symbol is changing or when the time of the normal symbol is shortened than when the gaming state is in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so it is possible to draw the regular symbol (second symbol) more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, the chance of winning the normal symbol increases, so the player can be given more opportunities to have the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 in the open state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can be entered into the second prize opening 640 by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a. When the state is such that it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or the normal symbol's time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will be constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

Normal prize openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80, and allow some of the balls that flow down the game board, among the balls fired at the game board, to pass through. It is composed of In addition, the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 is arranged to be able to detect game balls flowing down the internal flow path of the path configuration device 700.

When the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765 is held up to a maximum of 4 times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B mentioned above, and the second The symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. This may be performed using a part of the 3-symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). ) may be set. Further, the number of ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 arranged on the base plate 60 is not limited to two, and may be one, or other plurality (for example, three or more). It may be.

In addition, the installation positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, for example, they may be installed on either the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or the variable display It may be above or below the device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, the sensor SE as the first winning port switch provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is made, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, the sensor SE as the first winning hole switch or the second winning hole switch (so that the falling balls do not pass continuously) It also serves as one of the winning holes (prize ball hole) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls based on each switch (disposed) being turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five. Further, the magnitude relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be slidable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state (retracted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. , the electric accessory 640a will be in an excited state (entering state), and the ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the normal symbol's variable display is also shorter, so the normal symbol The "○" symbol may be displayed more easily in the variable display. That is, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened may also be made longer than during the normal state.

During the probability change of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol, a state can be created in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 compared to the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like that provided in the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, a, b, c) that provides the maximum profit (number of prize balls in the special gaming state) as the jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is the second winning slot. The winning amount is set higher when the ball enters the winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory 640a like the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a de-energized state (retracted state), and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640. A ball is fired toward the first prize opening 64 so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning a prize in the first prize opening 64, there is an opportunity for a jackpot lottery. It is more advantageous for the player to aim to win more and win the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is changing or the time is shortening of normal symbols, by passing the ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in an excited state. (entering state), and it is easy to win a prize in the second prize opening 640. Therefore, the ball should be directed toward the side where the electric accessory 640a is arranged so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80. (so-called "right shot"), pass through the normal prize opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a, and aim to win a jackpot by entering the second prize opening 640. This is more advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery performed due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the jackpot will be announced after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the symbol is stopped. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (specified number) are won).

This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (gaming value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on one ball winning a prize.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing plate to open and close in the front and back direction. There is. Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to retract the opening/closing plate to the rear, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and distinguishing between the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by repeating the following states alternately.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the lower side of the first winning hole 64, for example. , the left and right sides or the upper side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

The overall configuration of route configuration device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the route configuring device 700, FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the route configuring device 700, and FIGS. 7(a) and 7(b) are VIIa- FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the path configuration device 700 along line VIIa.

In FIG. 6, the inner peripheral surface of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the outer shape of the collection hole 752 are illustrated with broken lines. Further, FIG. 7(a) shows a retracted state in which the electric accessory 640a is retracted from the first ball throwing route KR1, which will be described later, and FIG. 7(b) shows the electric accessory 640a moving toward the first ball throwing route KR1. The approach state being entered is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the path configuration device 700 includes a front side forming part 710 that is disposed below the center frame 86 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60; A back side forming part 720 disposed on the back side with respect to the front side.

The front side forming part 710 is formed mainly including a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and bending members 740 arranged on the front side on both left and right sides of the winning member 730. Ru.

The back side forming part 720 includes an intervening member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the intervening member 750, and a solenoid 640s on the intervening member 750. It is formed mainly by a fixedly arranged electric accessory 640a.

The winning member 730 includes a cover plate part 711 which is disposed on the front surface of the base plate 60 and is thinly formed in a shape that covers the through hole 60a and is attached to the base plate 60, and a cover plate part 711 located at the left and right center position of the cover plate part 711. an upper ball passage hole 713 that is bored in the front-rear direction, a lower ball passage hole 714 that is arranged below the upper ball passage hole 713 and is drilled in the front-rear direction, and a left-right direction of the covered plate part 711. A first winning hole 64 located at the upper center, a second winning hole 640 located below the first winning hole 64 (below the lower ball passing hole 714), and a second winning hole 640 located on both sides in the left and right direction. A through hole 731 is formed to penetrate through the hole 731, a lower insertion hole 732 is located below the through hole 731 and is formed to penetrate in the front and back direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 is formed to penetrate in the front and back direction on the left side of the lower insertion hole 732 on the right side. a first ball throwing section 734 having a ball passage hole 734a, a through hole 735 formed to penetrate in the front and back direction as a long hole extending from the right end of the lower edge of the first ball throwing section 734 in the upper right direction; A second ball throwing part 736 has a ball passing hole 736a formed to penetrate in the front-back direction on the right side of the lower insertion hole 732, and a second ball throwing part 736 is formed laterally symmetrically with the first ball throwing part 734 with the upper ball passing hole 713 as a reference. A third ball throwing section 737 is formed.

The through hole 731 is a member into which an upper protrusion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front and opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protrusion 741 when viewed from the rear. .

The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750 disposed on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape when viewed from the front, with a curved lower surface side.

A sensor SE for detecting passage of a ball is provided on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member that is formed into a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a through hole formed in its side surface with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. The passage of can be detected. The sensor SE is arranged such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thereby, the opening direction of the through hole can be made to be inclined slightly downward toward the back side, so that it is possible to suppress the ball passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE from staying inside the through hole.

The first ball sending part 734 includes a ball passing hole 734a disposed at a position communicating with the upstream end of the first inclined groove 755 of the intervening member 750, and a U-shaped ball passing hole 734a in a front view. A protruding edge 734b whose edge protrudes toward the front side, a downstream portion of the protruding edge 734b protruding toward the ball path side, and a tip of the protruding edge slanting toward the back side. A downstream ball throwing section 734c is provided that is capable of throwing a ball flowing down from the ball to the back side.

The through hole 735 is formed in a shape that allows the movable plate member 641 to be inserted in the front-back direction. That is, it is formed in a shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the right guide part 643 and the left guide part 645 of the movable plate member 641 and the connecting part that connects them when viewed from the front.

As a result, when the movable plate member 641 is in the retracted state, the front end of the movable plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735, and when the movable plate member 641 is in the advanced state, the rear end side of the movable plate member 641 is supported by the through hole 735. By doing so, the arrangement of the movable plate member 641 can be stabilized.

The second ball sending portion 736 includes a ball passing hole 736a disposed at a position communicating with the upstream end of the second inclined groove 757 of the intervening member 750, and a U-shaped ball passing hole 736a in a front view. A protruding edge 736b whose edge protrudes toward the front side, a downstream portion of the protruding edge 736b protruding toward the ball path side, and a tip of the protruding portion having a shape that slopes toward the back side. A downstream ball throwing section 736c is provided that is capable of throwing a ball flowing down from the ball to the back side.

While the third ball throwing section 737 is formed laterally symmetrically with the first ball throwing section 734, it is not configured so that the game ball is guided by the electric accessory 640a. It has a shape that allows balls to enter from the left side, making it possible to reduce the frequency of balls entering the ball. The third ball throwing section 737 has the same function as the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). That is, when a ball enters, 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that since balls rarely enter the third ball throwing section 737, the number of prize balls is set at the maximum (15 balls) in order to maximize the player's profit in the event that a ball enters the third ball throwing section 737.

The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is located at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. Two of them are arranged symmetrically, and their external shapes are formed to be approximately left and right symmetrical.

Further, the bending member 740 is arranged at a position where a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area when viewed from the front. This prevents the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 from being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and remaining in the game area.

The bending member 740 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 that protrudes from the back surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 that protrudes from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. and an opening 744 formed between the opposing lower protrusions 743.

The upper protrusion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom when viewed from the rear, and its outer shape is set to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Thereby, when placing the bending member 740 on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted into the through hole 731. Therefore, when placing the bending member 740 on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and positioned, thereby simplifying the assembly process.

The lower protrusion 743 is formed below the upper protrusion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in rear view with an open upper side. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 are formed to face each other in the vertical direction.

The lower protrusion 743 provides a path (hereinafter referred to as "second ball throwing path KR2") for throwing the ball from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. This is a member for forming the lower insertion hole 732 and is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 toward the back side is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 with the protruding end surface of the lower protruding portion 743 in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the ball, and a ball throwing path (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "first ball throwing route KR1") is formed.

The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743 . The guide portion 742 protrudes in a substantially U-shape with an open back side when viewed from the side.

The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that vertically throws the ball from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first ball throwing path KR1) and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The height of the lower inner edge in the vertical direction is slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 disposed on the back surface.

The guide portion 742 is formed along the left-right center line of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side when viewed from the front. As a result, the ball comes into contact with the guide portion 742 and is guided (folded back to the back side), so that the ball can be easily displaced in the left-right direction.

The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left and right direction when viewed from the rear. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U-shape with the rear side open when viewed from the side.

The height of the upper end of the rear side end of the opening 744 is set to be approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the front end side of the guide portion 742 at the same front-back position, and the height of the lower end of the rear side end is set to be approximately the same as the front end side of the guide portion 742 at the same front-back position. , is set at approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 of the movable plate member 641. The opening 744 is formed to open on the side surface in the left and right direction of the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the fourth ball throwing path KR4.

The distribution member 760 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a box-like body with an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left and right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The sorting member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that are inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction in a front view toward both left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 disposed at the center of each inclined surface 761, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. A ball sending opening 763 formed in the top, a regulating wall part 764 for regulating the rotation of the seesaw member 762, and a normal winning opening (through hole) disposed at a position where the ball guided to the right inclined surface 761 can pass through. gate) 765.

The pair of inclined surfaces 761 are inclined surfaces extending in opposite left and right directions, and are formed so that the inclination angles with respect to the horizontal plane are bilaterally symmetrical. In this embodiment, a region with a slightly steep inclination angle is provided on the upstream side, and a region with a gentle inclination angle on the downstream side is formed at an inclination angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane.

The ball sending port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning port 64 of the winning member 730. Thereby, when the distribution member 760 is disposed on the intervening member 750 described later, a space can be formed between the ball throwing port 763 and the intervening member 750 facing each other.

The space is formed into a space larger than the outer diameter of the ball (that is, a space through which the ball can pass), and the first winning opening of the winning member 730 is formed through a through hole 60b drilled in the base plate 60. 64 internal spaces. Thereby, the ball won in the first winning opening 64 can be thrown into the space between the facing ball opening 763 and the intervening member 750, and the ball can be thrown inside the space.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inner side of the annular ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is held between the intervening member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is arranged to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for distributing the balls alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761, one by one, when the ball is thrown from the space between the above-described opposing ball opening 763 and the intervening member 750. The ball is thrown to the side opposite to the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a is located. The protrusions 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the seesaw member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes displaces the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a at the center is located (rotating the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is regulated by the contact between the distal end surface of the protrusion 762a and the regulating wall 764.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the projection 762a at the center of the projection 762a that is not in contact with the regulating wall portion 764, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the regulating wall portion 764, thereby regulating its displacement.

The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of the path on which the balls distributed left and right by the seesaw member 762 described above roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as "third ball throwing path KR3"), and is a rolling surface of the distribution member 760. It is formed to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are thrown (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined toward the intervening member 750 such that the back side surface becomes thicker forward toward the end. Thereby, the ball that has rolled on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end thereof can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the intervening member 750 disposed in front of the distribution member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged between the intervening member 750 and the distributing member 760, and is fixedly arranged inside by connecting and fixing the intervening member 750 and the distributing member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged so that the inner surface of the ball passage hole of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the side along the slope 761 are in the same position as the top surface of the slope 761. The arrangement of is designed.

As a result, when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the resistance given to the ball can be minimized, and the slope on the right side where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged. It is possible to equalize the speed of the ball flowing down the ball 761 and the ball flowing down the left inclined surface 761 where the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 is not provided.

The function of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is common to the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 and 67 described above. That is, the normal winning a prize opening (through gate) 765 has a function as a detection opening where a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn by lottery when a ball passes through.

In addition, when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67 is The ball is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). ) may be set.

The second symbol display device 83 predetermines the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbols) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765. This is a variable display that lights up alternately over time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

When the variable display ends on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls remains for the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, the next normal symbol lottery will be held, and the next normal symbol will be drawn. A variable display according to the lottery starts.

The intervening member 750 is a member interposed between the front and back of the bending member 740 and the distribution member 760, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. 65, a communication hole 751 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, a recovery hole 752 that opens on the lower side of the communication hole 751, and a long left and right hole in the front-rear direction between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752. A support recess 753 formed through the support recess 753, a linear first inclined groove 755 that slopes downward toward the left side in front view with the left and right center position as the downstream end, and a right and left center below the first inclined groove 755. It mainly includes a linear second inclined groove 757 that slopes downward toward the left side when viewed from the front with the downstream end position as the downstream end, and a second recovery hole 758 that is disposed below the second inclined groove 757. It is formed.

The communication hole 751 is formed on the front side of both left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and is also formed on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 mentioned above passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth ball throwing path KR4"). ) can be formed.

As described above, the recovery hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is thrown into the opening of the collection hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device for circulating balls installed in the store, and the balls collected in the collection hole 752 are circulated by the circulation device and shot out from the ball firing unit 112a again as game balls. .

The support recess 753 is a recess groove formed to ensure sufficient space for the right side guide portion 643 of the movable plate member 641 to move in the front-rear direction. The lower bottom surface of the support recess 753, which faces the lower surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape that is horizontal in the left-right direction. Further, the upper surface of the support recessed portion 753, which faces the upper surface of the right guide portion 643 in the vertical direction, is formed in a planar shape with an inclination angle similar to that of the inclined surface 643a.

That is, the support recess 753 is recessed from the left side to the right side, and is formed in a wedge shape that is wide on the left side and narrow on the right side.Functionally, the support recess 753 has a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width of the right guide part 643 when viewed from the front. (slightly larger wedge shape).

As a result, when using the movable plate member 641, when sliding it in the front-back direction, the right guide part 643 is guided inside the support recess 753, so the movement can be smoothly executed, and the right When the guide portion 643 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 and receives a ball flowing down, the right guide portion 643 can be supported by the lower bottom surface of the support recess 753. That is, the support recess 753 has the effect of smoothing the movement of the movable plate member 641 and the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the movable plate member 641.

The first inclined groove 755 is disposed at a position where the upstream end communicates with the ball passing hole 734a, and the ball that has reached the downstream end is sent to the front side through the upper ball passing hole 713 of the front side forming part 710. Consists of possible shapes.

The second inclined groove 757 is disposed at a position where the upstream end communicates with the ball passing hole 736a, and allows the ball that has reached the downstream end to pass through the lower ball passing hole 714 of the front side forming part 710 to the front side. Constructed in a shape that allows for ball throwing.

In this embodiment, the first slanted groove 755 and the second slanted groove 757 are formed in a linear groove shape, and the straight lines along which the respective grooves follow are parallel to each other.

The second collection hole 758 is an opening through which the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is thrown, and is arranged upstream of the second winning opening switch (not shown). The second collection hole 758 is connected to a ball circulating device installed in the store, and the balls collected in the second collection hole 758 are circulated by the circulation device and returned as game balls from the ball firing unit 112a. It is launched.

The upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 are arranged on a straight line along the vertical direction, and the second prize opening 640 is arranged below the lower ball passing hole 714 on the same straight line ( (See Figure 6).

Therefore, the ball thrown to the front side through the upper ball passage hole 713 passes through the front side of the lower ball passage hole 714 and enters the second winning hole 640. Further, the ball thrown to the front side through the lower ball passage hole 714 merges with the flow path of the ball thrown to the front side from the upper ball passage hole 713, and enters the second winning hole 640.

At the confluence position of the downward flow paths of the balls, the downward direction of the balls flowing down from the upper ball passage hole 713 is in the vertical direction, and the falling speed at the confluence position can be increased. Even if the balls guided from the ball passage hole 714 arrive at the merging position at the same time, the balls flowing down from the upper ball passage hole 713 can be passed downward with momentum, making it easy to avoid clogging of the balls.

Moreover, the wall portions 714a extending from the left and right edges of the lower ball passage hole 714 toward the front side can easily prevent the balls from deviating from the merging position to the left and right. Moreover, the wall portion 714a also acts to prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 from the left and right outer sides.

The wall portion 713a extending from the left and right edges and the upper edge of the upper ball passage hole 713 toward the front side prevents the ball from being thrown from the upper ball passage hole 713 toward the front side to the front side of the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent balls flowing down the side from colliding with each other. Moreover, the wall portion 713a also acts to prevent the balls that have flowed down the front side of the base plate 60 from flowing down toward the second winning opening 640 side.

The electric accessory 640a includes a solenoid 640s that is fixedly arranged on the intervening member 750, and a movable plate member 641 that is operatively connected to the solenoid 640s and slides in the front and rear directions when driven by the solenoid 640s.

The movable plate member 641 includes a transmission plate part 642 that is a plate-shaped part to which the driving force of the solenoid 640s is transmitted and extends in the vertical direction, and a transmission plate part 642 that is disposed at the front end of the transmission plate part 642. A left guide part 645 is formed to project from the left guide part 645, and a right guide part 643 is provided to extend to the right of the left guide part 645.

The right guide portion 643 is formed as an inclined surface 643a whose upper surface, which is a rolling surface of the ball, is inclined downward toward the right side, and is disposed between the communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 when viewed from the front.

The left guide part 645 is formed as an inclined surface 645a whose upper surface, which becomes a rolling surface of the ball, slopes downward toward the left side, and is arranged so as to connect the bending member 740 and the first ball sending part 734 when viewed from the front. Ru. The upper surface of the downstream end of the inclined surface 645a is arranged to be flush with the upper surface of the lower end of the protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734.

The protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734 is not in the shape of a saucer that is open upwards, but the open side is oriented toward the right side and has a lid on the top, so that the ball rolls on the left guide section 645. While smoothly receiving the ball, the ball that bounces off the left guide section 645 and the ball that flows down through a path that reaches the first ball throwing section 734 from above are prevented from jumping into the ball passing hole 734a. It is possible to make it less likely to occur. Note that the protruding lid portion 734b may be formed into a dish shape to allow a ball to fly in from above.

Note that even if the ball lands on the left guide section 645, it is difficult to enter the first ball throwing section 734 until the ball bounces off. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that reduces bounce on the left guide portion 645.

For example, by densely arranging nails that can collide with the balls above the left guide part 645, or by arranging a plurality of deceleration convex parts protruding from the front side of the cover plate part 711, the flow of the balls can be reduced. The momentum may be reduced in advance. Alternatively, a sheet member with high cushioning properties may be attached to the inclined surface 645a to suppress the ball from bouncing.

In the de-energized state where the solenoid 640s is de-energized, the movable plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it retracts from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(a)), and in the energized state of the solenoid 640s (where driving force is generated). In this state, the ball enters the first throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)).

A game ball is thrown in the following manner by the path configuring device 700 configured as described above. The ball that enters from the first prize opening 64 is thrown to the distribution member 760, and is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. When the ball thrown along the third ball throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third ball throwing path KR3, it enters the fourth ball throwing path KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the intervening member 750 disposed on the front side. The ball is thrown. The ball thrown along the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. A ball thrown along the first ball throwing path KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. The ball thrown along the second ball throwing route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, is thrown into the collection hole 752 of the intervening member 750, and passes through the inside of the sensor SE.

The ball thrown from the fourth ball throwing path KR4 to the first ball throwing path KR1 flows down toward the front side of the base plate 60, and the ball appears to be approaching the player in the player's line of sight. appear. This clarifies the difference in the falling manner from other game balls flowing downward in the gaming area, so it is possible to increase the presence of the ball thrown from the fourth ball throwing route KR4 to the first ball throwing route KR1. can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9, setting of the downward flow mode of the sphere will be explained. 8(a), FIG. 8(b), FIG. 9(a), and FIG. 9(b) are partial front views of the route configuring device 700 in range VIIIa of FIG. 6.

In FIG. 8(a), FIG. 8(b), FIG. 9(a), and FIG. 9(b), when three balls P1 to P3 enter the first winning hole 64 consecutively without any interval, The flow pattern in is illustrated in a time series at 0.5 second intervals.

That is, FIG. 8(b) is illustrated as a state 0.5 seconds after the state in FIG. 8(a), and FIG. 9(a) is illustrated as a state 0.5 seconds after the state in FIG. 8(b). FIG. 9(b) shows the state 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 9(a). As an example, FIG. 8A shows a state in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a faces leftward.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the ball P1 is guided by the projection 762a at the center, the guided ball P1 collides with one of the projections 762a at both ends and is pushed down. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a that has been displaced downward comes into contact with the regulating wall 764, thereby regulating its displacement (see FIG. 8(b)).

In this state, the ball P1 that has pushed down the seesaw member 762 is flowing down toward the right, and at the same time, the next ball P2 is guided by the central projection 762a. At this time, at the same time as the ball P2 reaches the central protrusion 762a, the ball P1 that has pushed down the seesaw member 762 first passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 (see FIG. 8(b)).

The ball P2 is flown down to the left by the seesaw member 762, and at the same time, the next ball P3 is guided to the central projection 762a. At this time, at the same time as the ball P3 reaches the central protrusion 762a, the ball P1 is placed below the right guide portion 643 (see FIG. 9(a)). Thereafter, the ball P3 is flown down to the right by the seesaw member 762 (see FIG. 9(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is defined in relation to the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a. That is, after the ball P1 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and before it is placed below the right guide part 643, the next ball P3 reaches the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. It is designed not to.

Here, when the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed based on a preset operation pattern. The operation of the electric accessory 640a is not interrupted in the middle of the operation pattern. Even if the passage of a ball is detected in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 while the operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the operation pattern is continued, the execution of the operation of the electric accessory 640a due to the detection is The operation of the electric accessory 640a based on the currently executed operation pattern is suspended until the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed.

Therefore, even if the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that it can influence the ball that has passed through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 based on the ball's falling time, the operation of the electric accessory 640a cannot be executed. If a situation where the ball is held up occurs, there is a possibility that the influence on the ball that has passed through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 will be unexpected.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set according to the time span until the ball reaches the right guide part 643, the next ball P3 enters the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric accessory 640a continues to operate due to the detection of the previous ball P1 in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until the ball P1 is detected in the through gate. (The operation of object 640a ends).

Therefore, when the passage of a ball is detected at the normal winning gate (through gate) 765, the electric accessory 640a immediately operates based on the preset operation pattern without suspending the execution of the operation of the electric accessory 640a. The following actions can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 will be unexpected.

10(a), FIG. 10(b), FIG. 11(a), and FIG. 11(b) are partial front views of the route construction device 700 in range VIIIa of FIG. 6. FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b) and FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b) illustrate different examples of how the ball flows down the right slope 761 in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 10(a), a state in which the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is illustrated, and in FIG. 10(b), when the ball passes, the movable plate member 641 moves to the first ball throwing path KR1. A state in which the ball is maintained in a retracted state (see FIG. 7(a)) and guided to the collection hole 752 is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 11(a), a state in which the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (same state as in FIG. 10(a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. A state in which the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)) and the ball is guided toward the second ball throwing section 736 is illustrated.

Note that the dots drawn on the movable plate member 641 in FIG. 11(b) indicate that the movable plate member 641 is sliding toward the front side and does not allow the ball to pass through the front side. is schematically shown.

Here, in the de-energized state in which the solenoid 640s is de-energized, the movable plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it retracts from the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(a)), and in the energized state (driving In the state in which a force is generated, the ball enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)). The ball passes through the front side of the movable plate member 641 and flows downward, while in the excited state, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 in the front view falls on the inclined surface 643a or the inclined surface 645a of the movable plate member 641. It rolls and flows down in the left and right direction.

For example, it flows down along the arrow shown in FIG. 11(b). Specifically, when the movable plate member 641 is in an excited state, the ball that has reached the first ball throwing path KR1 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 643a, passes through the opening 744, falls, and is received by the second ball throwing section 736. It will be done.

In addition, when the movable plate member 641 is in the excited state, a ball that is about to flow down between the right bending member 740 and the first ball sending part 734 rolls on the upper surface of the inclined surface 645a and is guided to the ball passing hole 734a. , the ball will enter the second winning hole 640.

FIG. 12 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in range XII of FIG. In FIG. 12, the solenoid 640s is energized and the movable plate member 641 is shown in an advanced state.

As mentioned above, the functions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 are common, so the ball that enters the path configuring device 700 passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Not limited to this case, when playing the above-mentioned right-handed game, the electric accessory 640a is activated even when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67.

In this case, more game balls fired in a right-handed game reach the ceiling surface of the right bending member 740 than the balls guided to the first prize opening 64 (approximately 10 times as many balls). ), in the advanced state of the movable plate member 641, the ball can more easily reach the left guide part 645 than the right guide part 643 of the electric accessory 640a.

If the solenoid 640s is maintained in an excited state until the ball reaches the left guide part 645, it flows down and reaches the first ball throwing part 734, the ball will enter the second prize opening 640, and the first ball will enter the second prize opening 640. Even if the solenoid 640s is switched to the de-energized state before reaching the ball sending section 734, the ball will simply flow downward and will not be guided to the recovery hole 752. In other words, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special symbol 1 is won by the ball reaching the left guide portion 645.

A ball that reaches the left guide section 645 in the entering state is received by the first ball throwing section 734 in about 1.0 seconds, regardless of the landing position. On the other hand, if the movable plate member 641 changes to the retracted state in a very short time such as 0.5 seconds, even if the ball lands near the left end of the left guide section 645 in the approach state, the first There is a possibility that the ball entering the ball throwing section 734 may be obstructed.

Therefore, the ball flowing down without entering the first prize opening 64 is operated as a result of a lottery by ball detection at the normal prize opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765 and enters the left side guide part. 645 in a timely manner, whether or not the ball is received by the first ball throwing section 734 depends on the operating mode of the electric accessories 640a.

In particular, in the operating pattern in the normal state (the fourth operating pattern described later), the period during which the movable plate member 641 is in the advancing state is shorter than 0.5 seconds, so the ball is received into the first ball throwing section 734. The probability is extremely low.

If the movable plate member 641 is in the entering state at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, it will be guided by the right guide section 643 and finally reach the second winning hole 640. Since the ball enters the ball, it does not pass through the sensor SE (see FIG. 7(b)), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the lottery of special symbol 1 is obtained. On the other hand, if the movable plate member 641 is in the retracted state at the timing when the ball reaches the first ball throwing route KR1, the ball is guided to the second ball throwing route KR2 and passes through the sensor SE, so that the special symbol 1 lottery is obtained. I will do it.

In this way, according to the electric accessory 640a of the present embodiment, the ball flows down a path that can reach the right guide section 643 (the path after the ball enters the first prize opening 64), or the ball flows down the path that can reach the right guide section 643 Depending on whether the ball falls along a route that can reach , the possibility of acquiring the special symbol 1 lottery (possibility of acquiring the special symbol 2 lottery) can be changed by the ball.

In addition, as mentioned above, the balls arrive at the right guide section 643 at intervals, but the balls arrive at the left guide section 645 at intervals due to the action of the seesaw member 762, so it is normal to win a prize. A plurality of balls flowing down the mouth (through gate) 67 side can arrive at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable that the left guide portion 645 be made stronger than the right guide portion 643.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the left guide portion 645 is disposed on the transmission plate portion 642 (see FIG. 5). That is, by disposing the left guide portion 645 on the transmission plate portion 642 that is closer to the solenoid 640s (upstream side of the driving force transmission path), changes in the posture of the left guide portion 645 are suppressed. This prevents the left guide part 645 from changing its posture excessively and increasing the operating resistance of the movable plate member 641 even when weight is applied to the left guide part 645 by a plurality of balls riding on it. be able to.

Note that the means for forming the left guide portion 645 to be strong is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, the left guide portion 645 may be thicker than the right guide portion 643, or a rib may be formed to connect the lower portion of the left guide portion 645 and the transmission plate portion 642.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be explained with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 13(b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 13(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, the game state after executing 15 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the first operation pattern described later. The condition continues until the next jackpot is won.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 49", and the jackpot B is defined in association with it (see 202b2 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot B, the gaming state after executing 8 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern described later. The condition continues until the next jackpot is won.

A jackpot C is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot C, the gaming state after executing the 4-round jackpot game (special game) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern described later. This state continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), there is a 20% probability of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% probability of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you cannot expect a large amount of prize balls. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 640) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b4 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, the game state after executing 15 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is set to be a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the high probability state, as in the case of jackpot A. The state set in operation pattern 1 continues until the next jackpot is won.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 49" is associated with and defined as a jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot b, the game state after executing 15 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is set to a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the first operation pattern described later. The condition continues until the next jackpot is won.

A jackpot c is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 13(b)).

In the case of jackpot c, the game state after executing the 15 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the third operation pattern described later. This state continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640), it is possible to play the jackpot game for 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot game ends. The distribution of the operation pattern of the subsequent electric accessory 640a is set to be different from the case where a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery. The difference is particularly noticeable in the case of jackpot c, but the details will be described later.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 13(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c1 in FIG. 13(c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202c2 in FIG. 13(c)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, and the second winning random number table 202c. , it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIGS. 14(a) to 14(d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and time-measured changes in the state of the electric accessory 640a. Note that FIG. 14(a) shows the time measurement change in the first operation pattern, FIG. 14(b) shows the time measurement change in the second operation pattern, and FIG. 14(c) shows the time measurement change in the third operation pattern. A timed change in the actuation pattern is illustrated, and in FIG. 14(d) a timed change in the fourth actuation pattern is illustrated.

Note that the fourth operation pattern is an operation pattern that is adopted during normal play or after the special symbol lottery has been completed 100 times after the end of jackpots C and c (see FIG. 13(b)).

In FIGS. 14(a) to 14(d), the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner when the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 (in this embodiment, after about 0.1 seconds) ), when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, each operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the time when the passage of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Of these, the meaning of the state of the electric accessory 640a during the reference time Td1 (approximately 0.5 seconds in this embodiment) after the passage of the ball is detected in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 will be explained in detail. .

The length of the reference time Td1 is set as the time corresponding to the time from when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until it passes through the right guide section 643.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the first operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, after the fluctuating display of the second symbol is finished (usually An entry state in which the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing path KR1 for a reference time Td1 (0.1 seconds after passage of the ball is detected in the winning opening (through gate) 765) (In the figures, it is also indicated as "shin". The same applies in subsequent figures).

In the first operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing route KR1 until about 3.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, exceeding the reference time Td1. This state is maintained (usually about 3.0 seconds elapse by the end of the symbol change).

As a result, when the passing of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to execution of a right-handed ball, the length is sufficient to guide the ball that has reached the left guide section 645 to the first ball throwing section 734. The state in which the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 can then be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

In addition, the movable plate member 641 can enter the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passing is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can enter the first ball throwing path KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and causing it to flow to the right, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the second ball-throwing section 736.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. The situation where the ball enters the mouth 640 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is obtained can be made more likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the second operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the electric accessory 640a is activated immediately before the elapse of the reference time Td1. The movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it enters the first ball throwing route KR1, and immediately after the elapse of the reference time Td1, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a is retracted from the first ball throwing route KR1 (in the figure, It is also indicated as ``retreat'' (the same applies in subsequent figures).

In the second operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a enters the first ball throwing path KR1 until approximately 1.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, exceeding the reference time Td1. This state is maintained (usually about 1.0 seconds elapses until the symbol changes end).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to right-handed hitting, even if the ball reaches the left guide section 645, the ball is transferred to the first ball throwing section 734. To make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 in a right-handed game, since it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 maintains a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing route KR1 with a length sufficient to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in a right-handed game. I can't.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can enter the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passage is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can be moved into the first ball throwing route KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and flowing it to the right, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the second ball-throwing section 736. Since the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the advanced state for 0.5 seconds after the ball reaches the right guide section 643, the ball can be stably thrown toward the second ball throwing section 736 side.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. The situation where the ball enters the mouth 640 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is obtained can be made more likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 14(c), in the third operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, after the fluctuating display of the second symbol is finished (usually After 0.1 seconds have passed since the passing of the ball was detected in the winning opening (through gate) 765), the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the state of entering the first ball throwing route KR1, and the reference time Td1 Immediately before the elapse of , the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1 (also referred to as "retreat" in the figure. The same applies in subsequent figures), and the reference time Td1 elapses. Immediately thereafter, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to a state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1.

In the third operation pattern, after the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the electric accessory 640a moves along the first ball throwing path KR1 until about 3.0 seconds after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. The state in which it has entered is maintained (usually about 3.0 seconds pass until the symbol changes end).

As a result, when the passing of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to execution of a right-handed ball, the length is sufficient to guide the ball that has reached the left guide section 645 to the first ball throwing section 734. The state in which the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 can then be maintained. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can be set in a state where it is evacuated from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passage is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can be moved away from the first ball throwing route KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and causing it to flow to the right, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the second ball-throwing section 736.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. A situation in which a ball enters the mouth 640 and the special symbol 2 is drawn can be made less likely to occur.

In addition, if the normal symbol (second symbol) continues to fluctuate at the timing when the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, the ball will be moved to the right. It may happen that the electric accessory 640a is brought into the entering state when reaching the first ball throwing route KR1. In this case, the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 enters the second winning hole 640, and the special symbol 2 lottery can be won.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), in the fourth operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 66, 67, 765, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a After the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throw path KR1 and changes to the advanced state, the movable plate member 641 of the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state again just before the reference time Td1 elapses. In the fourth operation pattern, the control is completed at the reference time Td1 (about 0.5 seconds usually elapses by the end of the symbol variation).

As a result, when the passage of the ball is detected by the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 due to right-handed hitting, even if the ball reaches the left guide section 645, the ball is transferred to the first ball throwing section 734. To make it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640 in a right-handed game, since it cannot be said that the moving plate member 641 maintains a state in which it has entered the first ball throwing route KR1 with a length sufficient to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in a right-handed game. I can't.

On the other hand, the movable plate member 641 can be set in a state where it is evacuated from the first ball throwing path KR1 before the ball whose passage is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 passes through the right guide section 643, so that the ball can be moved away from the first ball throwing route KR1. By rolling the ball on the upper surface of the right-side guide section 643 and causing it to flow to the right, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the second ball-throwing section 736.

As a result, compared to the situation in which the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 and is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 is detected by the sensor SE and wins the special symbol 1 lottery, the second prize is won. A situation in which a ball enters the mouth 640 and the special symbol 2 is drawn can be made less likely to occur. That is, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64, the lottery of the special symbol 1 can be repeatedly obtained.

According to each of the operation patterns described in detail above, in a game state in which the player aims to win a jackpot by acquiring the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery, it is possible to create special symbol lottery acquisition patterns in different modes.

For example, in the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, since it is possible to aim at winning the special symbol 2 lottery in a right-handed game, the above-mentioned "right-handed navigation" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable.

Furthermore, in the first operation pattern, the period in which the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 7(b)) is long, and the period in which the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the state in which it enters the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. Since the moving plate member 641 is in the state of entering the first ball throwing route KR1 when the reference time Td1 has elapsed after the passage of the ball is detected, even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64, A lottery of special symbol 2 can be won with a part of the balls swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage suffered by the player when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a right-handed game.

On the other hand, in the third operation pattern, the period in which the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the entering state (see FIG. 7(b)) is long, but after the passage of the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. When the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the moving plate member 641 is in a retracted state in which it is retracted from the first ball throwing path KR1, so when the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, a normal symbol (second symbol) is created. When the ball starts to fluctuate, the ball passes through the front side of the moving plate member 641 and is guided to the sensor SE.

That is, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the possibility of winning the special symbol 2 lottery with the ball swept to the right by the seesaw member 762 can be reduced. Thereby, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a right-handed game, the disadvantage suffered by the player can be increased compared to the case with the first operation pattern.

For example, in the second operation pattern and the fourth operation pattern, it is difficult to aim for the special symbol 2 lottery in a right-handed game because the operation time of the electric accessory 640a is too short. It is preferable to recommend a left-handed game without displaying the above-mentioned "right-handed navigation" on the symbol display device 81.

In this case, in the second operation pattern, the movable plate member 641 enters the first ball throwing path KR1 when the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the passing of the ball was detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. state (see FIG. 7(b)), even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 2 lottery is won with a part of the ball that is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. can do.

Thereby, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be alternately drawn to draw a special symbol that the player can obtain when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a left-handed game. In addition, if the movable plate member 641 is in the entry state after the passing of the ball is detected in the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the reference time Td1 has elapsed, the special symbol 2 lottery can be obtained only through the normal winning. This is a case where the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to fluctuate at the same time as the ball passes through the opening (through gate) 765, so when the passage of the ball is detected at the ordinary winning opening (through gate) 765, the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) begins to fluctuate. 2 symbol) continues to fluctuate, the effect of making it easier to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery cannot be achieved.

On the other hand, in the second operation pattern (or fourth operation pattern), the period from the detection of the ball at the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 to the end of the operation control of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, compared to the first and third operation patterns where the same time width is set to 3 seconds, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) will be suspended. . Therefore, the effect that it is easy to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery can be achieved with high probability.

On the other hand, in the fourth operation pattern, the entry state of the movable plate member 641 (see FIG. 7(b)) is short as in the second operation pattern, and the ball does not pass through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765. Since the movable plate member 641 is set in the retracted state when the reference time Td1 has passed after being detected, when the ball enters the first prize opening 64, the special symbol 2 is drawn by the ball that is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762. can reduce the possibility of acquiring Thereby, the special symbol 1 lottery can account for most of the special symbols that the player can obtain when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 during a left-handed game.

As described in detail above, according to each operation pattern, it is possible to create special symbol lottery acquisition patterns in different modes in a gaming state where the aim is to win a jackpot by acquiring the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. .

Returning to FIG. 13(b), the difference in profits obtained by the player between the jackpot with special symbol 1 and the jackpot with special symbol 2 will be explained.

First, the probability of winning the jackpot in the maximum round (15 rounds in this embodiment) is higher for special symbol 2. Of the jackpots for special symbol 1, the jackpot for the maximum round is 20%, while the jackpot for special symbol 2 is 100% for the maximum round. Therefore, at least in terms of the number of prize balls, the profit that the player obtains from a jackpot with the special symbol 2 is larger than the profit that the player obtains from a jackpot with the special symbol 1.

In addition, in the case of a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, if the special symbol 2 is a jackpot, it will be a 100% right-handed game, and you can repeatedly win the special symbol 2 lottery, but if the special symbol 1 is a jackpot. In 30% of the games (jackpot B), a left-handed game is recommended instead of a right-handed game, and special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately.

In this case, in a left-handed game, in addition to being less time efficient to obtain a special symbol lottery compared to a right-handed game, the special symbol 1 lottery is executed at 1/2, so the maximum round jackpot is There will be more hurdles to overcome.

In addition, in the case where the probability is low after the end of the jackpot game, if the special symbol 2 is a jackpot (jackpot c), it will be a right-handed game and you can repeatedly win the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 will be a jackpot. In (Jackpot C), a left-handed game is recommended instead of a right-handed game, and special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately.

In this case, in a left-handed game, in addition to being less time efficient to obtain a special symbol lottery compared to a right-handed game, the special symbol 1 lottery is executed at 1/2, so the maximum round jackpot is There will be more hurdles to overcome.

Furthermore, although the condition that the special symbol is drawn 100 times is the same, if it is jackpot C, it is easy to obtain the special symbol 2 drawn 100 times, whereas with jackpot C, it is easy to obtain the special symbol 1. Since 100 drawings are completed with 50 drawings and 50 drawings of the special symbol 2, it is practically possible to obtain the drawing of the special symbol 2 only 50 times.

In summary, compared to the jackpot due to the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot from the special symbol 2 lottery is at least as follows: firstly, it is easier to obtain the maximum round jackpot, and secondly, the special symbol 2 lottery It has the advantage that it is easy to obtain a game state repeatedly, and thirdly, it is easy to maintain a high time efficiency for obtaining a lottery of special symbols by playing right-handed games.

In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery with the special symbol 2 is executed preferentially, the explanation was made on the assumption that the variation time related to the lottery is selected with probability from the options of about 3 seconds to 5 minutes. It is not limited to. For example, in the case where the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are drawn at the same time, a game state may be configured in which the variation time related to the lottery of the special symbol 2 is intentionally set to be long.

That is, for example, in 100 special symbol drawings after the end of jackpot B or after the end of jackpot C, the variation time of the drawing of special symbol 2 may always be set to 10 minutes. In this case, on the premise that the ball entering the first winning hole 64 passes through the sensor SE and the second winning hole 640 alternately, the reserved number of special symbols 2 becomes full. If the ball enters the first winning hole 64 after the ball passes through the second winning hole 640, the special symbol 2 lottery cannot be won, and the special symbol 1 lottery will be repeatedly executed. Become.

In addition, the player can play the game without letting the ball enter the first winning hole 64 when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, but in this case, the time efficiency of the game may be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of jackpots that occur within the same period of time. This makes it easier for the game machine store to avoid operating in the red.

In the above-mentioned gaming state, the balls that are flown to the right from the seesaw member 762 have the benefit of winning the special symbol 2 lottery and the benefit of receiving the payout of the prize balls until the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full. Since it is given to the player, the profit that the player can get from the ball being swept to the left from the seesaw member 762 is that it gives the player the profit of winning the lottery of special symbol 1 and the profit of receiving the payout of the prize ball. is large.

On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, the balls that are flown to the right from the seesaw member 762 only give the player the benefit of receiving the payout of prize balls, so the special symbols 1 The profit obtained by the player is smaller than that of the ball thrown to the left from the seesaw member 762 by the amount of the profit obtained by winning the lottery.

In other words, the magnitude of the profit given to the player for the balls swept to the right side from the seesaw member 762 and the balls swept to the left side can be switched depending on whether or not the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming state, the operation of the movable plate member 641 based on the detection of a ball in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 may be configured to be selected by lottery from a plurality of operation patterns.

For example, the second operation pattern may be used for 5% of the operations, and the remaining 95% may be controlled so that the fourth operation pattern is used for the remaining 95% of the operations. In this case, if the movable plate member 641 operates in the second operation pattern, there is an advantage that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be obtained, so that attention to the movable plate member 641 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full, if the fourth operation pattern is operated, the special symbol 1 lottery can be won, but if the movable plate member 641 is operated in the second operation pattern, Since there is a disadvantage that it is not possible to obtain both special symbols 1 and 2 by lottery, attention to the movable board member 641 can be improved in this case as well. That is, whether the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full or not, the attention to the moving plate member 641 can be improved.

In addition, in the case where the lottery is executed simultaneously with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, a game state may be configured in which the variation time related to the lottery of the special symbol 1 is intentionally set to be long. For example, by always setting the variation time of the lottery for special symbol 1 to 10 minutes, the result of the lottery for special symbol 1 will be obtained in a gaming state where both the lottery for special symbol 1 and the lottery for special symbol 2 can occur. The special symbol 2 lottery can be executed multiple times beforehand. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a jackpot will occur unintentionally due to the lottery of special symbol 1, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A ball flowing down the right inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is arranged, and a ball flowing down the left inclined surface 761 where the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 is not arranged, It is possible to equalize the flow rate.

Also, the position where the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 branches into the flow path on the second winning opening 640 side (for example, the first ball throwing route KR1), or the position where the ball falls on the second winning opening 640 side (for example, , the upper ball passage hole 713, and the lower ball passage hole 714), the flow direction of the ball has a front-back component. Thereby, it is possible to highlight a location closely related to the flow of the ball to the second winning hole 640.

Further, the paths to the second prize opening 640 will merge on the front side of the lower ball passage hole 714, but this merge position is sufficiently far away from the movable plate member 641. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving plate member 641 is subjected to a load from the balls colliding at the merging position. In addition, by shifting the left and right positions of the upper ball passing hole 713 and the lower ball passing hole 714 and expanding the left and right width of the second prize opening 640 to more than two balls, the front side of the lower ball passing hole 714 It may also be possible to avoid merging of the channels at.

In addition, it is possible to manage so that the next ball is not detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 after the ball is detected at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 until the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends. It is possible to form the following cases. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled when the ball is detected can act on the ball that has passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 in a timely manner.

In addition, the movable plate member 641 is arranged to be able to act on the balls that have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and on the balls that have passed through the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 and 67. . Thereby, the usability of the movable plate member 641 can be increased.

In other words, even in a game state in which the movable plate member 641 is recommended for a left-handed game in which the ball is aimed at entering the first prize opening 64, a right-handed game in which the ball is aimed at the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is recommended. It can be used effectively even in a gaming state in which Note that this effect is not limited to bilaterally symmetrical board surfaces, but is also an effect that can be achieved, for example, on asymmetrical board surfaces (for example, a configuration in which the normal prize winning opening (through gate) 66 is omitted).

Regarding the number of balls riding on the movable plate member 641, while a plurality of balls can ride on the left guide section 645 at the same time, the number of balls riding on the right guide section 643 is limited to one. As a result, the durability of the movable plate member 641 can be improved by configuring the right guide portion 643 to be more durable than the left guide portion 645.

Moreover, by preparing a plurality of operation patterns of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to create acquisition patterns for special symbol lottery in different modes. For example, when the ball repeatedly enters the first winning hole 64, a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery is repeatedly obtained, and a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery are alternately obtained. Can be switched.

In addition, when a right-handed game is recommended as a winning pattern for the special symbol lottery, if the ball accidentally enters the first winning hole 64, a pattern that makes it easy to repeatedly acquire the special symbol 1 lottery, and a seesaw member. It is possible to switch between a pattern in which acquisition of the special symbol 1 lottery is avoided with a high probability for the ball swept to the right side in 762.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 24. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 when the ball flows down one of the routes distributed by the route configuration device 700 has been described, but the distribution unit of the second embodiment At 980, the ball is configured to pass through detection devices SE4 and SE5, which normally serve as through gates, in a plurality of paths through which the ball is sorted. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 in the second embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 15, illustration of units other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 15, a through hole 2060a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 is formed in the base plate 60 by router processing below the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached.

The through hole 2060a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, in a front view, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back side of the front unit 940, a drive unit 960 arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the The displacement member 966 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the driving force of a drive unit 960. Note that the displacement member 966 will be explained later.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done.

The drive unit 960 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, and is connected to the wing member 945 disposed on the front unit 940 via a displacement member 966. Thereby, as the displacement member 966 is operated by the driving force of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the wing member 945 will be given later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 16(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 18 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit 940. Note that in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated with hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the front unit 940 includes a back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The rear base 941 has an approximately T-shape with an upside-down outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is penetrated through the back base 941. The inside of the hole 2060a can be visually confirmed.

The back base 941 includes a first out port 71 formed with a cutout at the lower end, a specific winning port 65a located above the first out port 71, and formed through a horizontally long rectangular shape, and It mainly includes a second winning hole 640 that is formed penetratingly above the winning hole 65a, and a first winning hole 64 that is cut out and formed on the edge (upper edge) on the opposite side to the first out hole 71.

The back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a extending in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through hole 941a is formed from a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side toward the back side, and a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter decreases from the back side toward the front side.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded part of the tapping screw. be done.

Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side toward the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to a positioning hole formed around the through hole 2060a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning a prize opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened to the rear base 941 from the rear side with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the back base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (playing area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side toward the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heads of the screws from protruding toward the back side of the back base 941. As a result, when the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the gravity direction of the back base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the bottom of the notch (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is spaced apart from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, any of the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the specific winning hole 65a, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2) Game balls that have not flowed in can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first prize opening 64 is formed to have an inner edge larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving part 941g, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 16(b)) via the first prize opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, there is a first receiving part 941g formed in a cup shape and protruding toward the gaming area side (the front side of the page in FIG. 16(a)), and a first receiving part 941g on the side opposite to the gaming area (FIG. b) A first ball throwing portion 942g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side in the drawing.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed in a size that can receive one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving part 941g (first winning opening 64) in the direction of gravity can be made to flow into the inside of the first receiving part 941g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is formed with a bottom surface inclined downwardly toward the back side. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving part 941g can be thrown to the back side (first ball throwing part 942g side) via the first prize opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g includes guide portions 941g1 extending downward from the upper end portions of both ends of the base plate 60 in the transverse direction (left-right direction in FIG. 16) so as to be inclined outward in the left-right direction. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the gaming area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving part 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving part 941g due to the game ball flowing down the downstream area colliding with the first receiving part 941g.

Furthermore, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, there is a possibility that there will be insufficient placement of game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to change the downward direction of the game ball. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flowing direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost. .

Further, the guide portion 941g1 can guide the game ball outward in the left-right direction when the game ball flowing down the front side of the back base 941 toward the second winning opening 640 side collides with the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the probability of a game ball entering the second winning hole 640 from becoming excessively high.

The first ball throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first ball throwing section 942g is formed with a bottom surface inclined downward toward the back side, and a protruding tip side thereof comes into contact with an edge of an inlet 982d of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving part 941g to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first prize opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 in which the upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side. The first recessed cutout 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second prize opening 640 is formed through the hole in a substantially D-shape with an upward curve when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball thrown between the opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown from the second winning opening 640 to the back side.

The second winning a prize opening 640 is formed with a front side wall part 941b projecting toward the front side and a second ball throwing part 942c projecting toward the back side at its edge.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface comes into contact with a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball throwing portion 942c is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 640. The second ball throwing portion 942c is set to have a dimension larger in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16(b)) than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, can be prevented from falling from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

The pair of second ball throwing parts 942c are arranged such that the distance between the opposing sides in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 16(b)) is the width direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. The length is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction (FIG. 16(b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside.

The second ball throwing section 942c is arranged inside the displacement member 966 in the assembled state, and is arranged to face the displacement member 966 in the vertical and horizontal directions. The width between the outer surfaces of the second ball throwing portion 942c is slightly shorter than the width between the inner surfaces of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 966. Thereby, the second ball throwing portion 942c can limit the left-right displacement of the displacement member 966.

The back base 941 is recessed in two places in a circular shape from the gaming area side of the back base 941 toward the side opposite to the gaming area on the upper side near the second winning opening 640 (first winning opening 64 side). A first shaft hole 941d, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating through the back base 941, and the opposing outer sides of the two first openings 941e. and a first guide wall 942b located at and protruding from the rear side.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. Further, the first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. This can prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide vertical displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced, and the distance between the pair of opposing first guide walls 942b is as follows: It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction (left-right direction).

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a has an opening formed in a long rectangular shape in the direction in which the pair of wing members 945 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 16(b)), and an opening/closing plate of a specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is located inside the opening. will be placed.

The back base 941 has a bulging part 942h that bulges out between the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball throwing part 942c, and a bulging part 942h that bulges between the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball throwing part 942c, and a first guide wall 942b side (upper side in FIG. 16(b)) from the outer frame of the specific winning opening 65a. ) and a second guide wall 942d that projects.

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back side of the back base 941, and is connected to the outer frame of the specific winning opening 65a and the second ball throwing portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (described later) is disposed on the rear side of the rear base 941, the contact area between the displacement member 966 and the rear surface of the rear base 941 can be reduced, and the friction (sliding) of the displacement member 966 can be reduced. ) resistance can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the width direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) can be restricted.

Therefore, in the displacement member 966, not only is the above-mentioned second ball throwing section 942c disposed on the inside so that the displacement in the left and right direction is limited, but also the second guide wall 942d is disposed on the outside so that the displacement in the left and right direction is limited. Ru. Thereby, the left-right displacement of the displacement member 966 can be restricted for a long period of time.

The back base 941 includes second out ports 941f formed by cutting out a semicircular shape toward the bottom at the upper edges of both left and right ends of the specific winning a prize port 65a. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has entered the third receiving part 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60, and has a shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is formed.

Further, a third ball throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing part 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of a U-shape in rear view is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes to the back side, and the third ball throwing part 942e is formed to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape in rear view protrudes to the back side. can be rolled to the back side.

The back base 941 has a third through hole 941i that is formed to extend linearly upward from the upper end of the first opening 941e, and a first A fourth through hole 941j formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 941d, and a ball throwing hole 941k formed with a size that allows a game ball to pass between the pair of third through holes 941i. , and a rolling plate portion 941l extending toward the back side with the lower edge of the ball feeding hole 941k as the base end.

The third through hole 941i is a through hole for passing the extension portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e to the back side when the wing member 945 is assembled. Further, the fourth through hole 941j is a through hole for allowing displacement of the extended portion 945d during operation of the wing member 945, and the displacement locus of the extended portion 945d in a front view (view in the axial direction of the shaft member 945a). The hole is drilled in a shape that includes the whole. Note that since the plate-like portion 945e is disposed on the back side passing through the back base 941, it is not necessary to consider the displacement locus of the plate-like portion 945e.

The ball throwing hole 941k is an opening for throwing the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e to the front side when the wing member 945 is in the open state. Since the lower part of the ball throwing hole 941k is left open on the front side of the ball throwing hole 941k (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the possibility that a ball enters the ball throwing hole 941k from the front side can be reduced.

That is, while forming the front side region of the ball-throwing hole 941k as a meeting point for the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e and the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the wing-shaped main body 945, the ball that has passed through the ball-throwing hole 941k is formed. The flow can be directed exclusively to the front side.

The rolling plate portion 941l is formed as an inclined plate that slopes upward toward the back side, and is configured to cause the ball riding on the extended distal end side to flow down toward the base end side (front side). The ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941 and reached the base end passes through the ball sending hole 941k and reaches the front side of the back base 941 (the space between the back base 941 and the front base 943). , then it will flow down.

The front base 943 is formed into an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-shaped body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and back base 941.

The front base 943 is mainly formed with a second receiving part 943c and a third receiving part 944a that are protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 640 and the second out opening 941f of the above-mentioned back base 941. be done.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the back, and the second winning opening 640 of the back base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are provided on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape).

Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the opposing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and to suppress the game ball from flowing into the second prize opening 640 from the outside between the opposing sides of a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c includes a ball throwing guide portion 943d that projects inward from the inner edge thereof, and a rolling portion 943a that projects from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

A pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed below the pair of wing members 945. Further, the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end surfaces come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed between the pair of opposing wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on the lower side between the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and is formed such that an upper end surface 943a1 is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. Moreover, as mentioned above, the rolling part 943a is arranged at the inner lower end of the second prize opening 640 in the state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the back side. It protrudes from the back side of the base 941.

Thereby, the game ball thrown between the pair of ball throwing guide parts 943d facing each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end surface 943a1, and the back surface of the back base 941 Can throw the ball to the side.

Further, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, into which the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be held and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, which face each other.

The third receiving portion 944a has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving part 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving part 944a can be passed through the second outlet 941f to the rear surface. He can throw the ball to the side.

A pair of wing members 945 are arranged with the second prize opening 640 formed in the back base 941 sandwiched therebetween when viewed from the front. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 includes a wing-like main body 945m formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front and having a thickness smaller than the width between the facing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and a back side of the wing-like main body 945m. A protrusion 945b protruding from the wing-shaped body 945m, an insertion hole 945c formed through the wing-shaped body 945m in the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side), and an insertion hole 945c located at the end of the wing-shaped body 945m. A connecting portion 945d extends from the opposite end to the rear side, and a plate extends from the distal end side of the extending portion 945d in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16(a)) of the wing-shaped main body 945m. It mainly includes a plate-like portion 945e that extends in the shape of a plate.

The extended portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e are configured to pass through the through-holes 941i, 941j in the assembled state (see FIG. 16(a)) and to be operable inside the distribution unit 980. will be described later.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the back base 941 and the front base 943, by inserting the shaft member 945a into the insertion hole 945c, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the wing member 945 is rotatable. Can be placed between opposite sides. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state (see FIG. 16(a)) in which the rotating tip side is close to each other, and an open state in which the rotating tip side is displaced to open both left and right outwards.

The protrusion 945b is inserted into a sliding groove 966a2 of a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission portion to which the driving force of the drive unit 960 is transmitted. The protrusion 945b is dimensioned such that its tip can pass through the first opening 941e of the back base 941, protrude toward the back side of the back base 941, and be inserted into the sliding groove 966a2.

The displacement member 966 is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from the upper end, and a bulging portion that protrudes toward the rear side from the lower end. 966b, and a second opening 966c is formed therethrough at approximately the center position when viewed from the front.

The second opening 966c has an inner edge shape larger than the second winning opening 640 when viewed from the front, and the second winning opening 640 is arranged inside. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 640 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The protruding portion 966a includes contact portions 966a1 located on both outer sides in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966 and extending in the longitudinal direction, and a sliding groove 966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction. , is provided.

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both widthwise opposing inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which the transmission member of the drive unit 960 is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member.

In response to the displacement member 966 being placed in the lower position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state. On the other hand, in response to the displacement member 966 being placed in the upper position via the transmission member of the drive unit 960, the wing member 945 is brought into the open state.

Next, the distribution unit 980 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 20(a) is a diagram taken along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 19(a). 20(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a).

The distribution unit 980 includes a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a distribution section rotatably disposed between the front base 981 and the rear base. 983. Note that the distribution section 983 is a member corresponding to the seesaw member 762 in the first embodiment.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed above the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d extending through the outer edge of the base portion 985a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed from the front base 981 side toward the back side at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) of the base portion 985a. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the opening 985b and the opening 985c are formed such that the lower inner surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side (back side) of the front base 981.

The opening 985e is formed closer to the opening 985b than the left-right center position, and the opening 985f is formed closer to the opening 985c than the left-right center position. In the following, since the openings 985e and 985f have similar configurations, a detailed explanation will be given of the opening 985f that can receive the balls that have flown down the second passage TR2, and the opening 985f that can accept the balls that have flowed down the first passage TR1. A description of the opening 985e will be omitted.

The opening 985f extends in the direction of gravity and connects the inflow passage 985f1, which is a space that opens on the front base 981 side, and the discharge passage 985f3, which has a space that opens on the side opposite to the front base 981, and extends in the direction of gravity. 19(b) and FIG. 20(a)).

The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to a second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985, which will be described later, and is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The intermediate passage 985f2 is formed to extend in the direction of gravity, has an upper side communicated with the inflow passage 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passage 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passage 985f2.

The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3, and a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction where the detection hole SE1a is not formed.

Further, the detection device SE3 is arranged such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passage 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Ru. Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the upper side of the intermediate passage 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passage 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portion 985f4 is formed to be continuous with the space of the inflow passage 985f1 and the discharge passage 985f3. That is, the intermediate passage 985f2 is formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passage 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the lower side of the intermediate passage 985f2, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passage 985f3 is connected to the insertion hole of the passage unit 990 in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985f3, and the ball can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed at the lower end of the back base 985 at the left-right center position. Further, the opening 985g is formed such that the lower inner surface is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passage 985f1 is connected to a second passage TR2 formed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985, which will be described later, and is formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passage 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The rear base 985 has an opening 985k, which is a cutout for arranging the detection devices SE4, SE5 in the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 (described later), which has approximately the same external shape as the detection devices SE4, SE5 when viewed from the rear. Formed by shape. Thereby, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981). Note that the structures of the detection devices SE4 and SE5 are the same as those described above as the structure of the detection device SE3, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the inner space of the detection hole SE1a and the first passage TR1 or It is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the space of the two passages TR2.

Thereby, when the game ball flows down from the upper side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, it can pass through the detection holes SE1a of the detection devices SE4 and SE5. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Moreover, since the detection devices SE4 and SE5 are formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, it is possible to easily utilize the weight of the game ball when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the connecting portion between the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The detection devices SE4 and SE5 are configured as devices in which a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn when it is detected that a ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a.

The opening 985k is formed to be continuous with the space of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 in the direction of gravity. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the opposite side of the back base 985). It is formed mainly of a protruding portion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f, and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 15) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b standing upright on the front side along the edge thereof.

In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 640 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 640 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright tip surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 18) of the winning hole unit 930 when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. be done. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the lower inner surface located below the end surface 943a1 (see FIG. 18) of the rolling portion 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side. It is formed by

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion, and a wall shape extending toward the rear base 985 side at approximately the left and right center position when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with an erected wall 982a, and recesses 982e to 982j formed as curved surfaces that can throw game balls to the back side at a plurality of locations under the direction of gravity.

The bulging portion 982 also includes a ball throwing opening 982k that is formed in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the standing wall 982a, and an insertion opening 982l that is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides of the ball-throwing opening 982k. and a rotation permitting opening 982m formed in a shape extending outward from the upper end of the insertion opening 982l to the left and right sides.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inflow port 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 on the upper edge thereof that protrudes toward the side opposite to the back base 985 side. The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 (see FIG. 18) of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60. In this case, the second protrusion 982d1 comes into contact with the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 19(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the lower end surface of the inlet 982d is the distance from the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 to the lower inner edge of the first ball throwing section 942g. The distance is set to be larger than the distance up to the dimension L15 (see FIG. 16(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the upright wall 982a is formed below the inlet 982d, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in an upper side having a triangular shape when viewed from the upright direction.

The vertical distance between the erected wall 982a and the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and between the opposing sides there is a first passage TR1 and a space through which the game ball can pass. A second passage TR2 is formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c that protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 is formed on the upper side of the standing wall 982a. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulge 982 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The balls guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 are guided to a ball discharge passage (not shown). That is, the ball guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2 is ejected without giving any profit to the player, like the ball that has flowed into the first outlet 71.

Note that various changes can be made to the profit given to the player by the ball guided to the first branch passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2. For example, it may be designed as a profit in which a preset number of prize balls are paid out, or it may be designed as a profit obtained when a ball is detected by a detection device for performing a normal symbol lottery or a jackpot lottery. Also good.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed from the lower inner surface of the bulge 982 in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend downward by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the second passage TR2, and the game balls that have flowed into the second passage TR2 can also flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

Ball throwing opening 982k is formed between recess 982h and recess 982j. Moreover, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the ball throwing opening 982k. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized.

The rolling surface 982g formed on the lower side of the third branch passage BK3 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. As a result, the third branch passage BK3 becomes a passage through which game balls flowing down the back side of the front base 981 can pass to the front side of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. .

In this embodiment, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be able to receive the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the received game ball is transferred to the ball throwing opening 982k and the ball throwing hole 941k ( The ball flows toward the front side through the ball (see FIG. 16(a)) and is configured to be able to enter the second winning hole 640.

The inclined portion 982b of the bulging portion 982 is formed below the bulging portion 982, and extends downward toward the rear base 985 side. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed across the left and right width direction of the bulge portion 982 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined.

As a result, by bringing the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, and the second branch passage BK2 into contact with the inclined part 982b, the game balls flowing down are directed toward the openings 985b to 985f. (back side) so that it can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

On the other hand, by bringing the game ball flowing down the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the rolling surface 982g, the game ball flowing down is guided to the throwing ball opening 982k side (front side), making it easier to flow into the throwing ball opening 982k. be able to.

The rolling surface 982g does not have a left-right symmetric shape when viewed from the front, but has a left-right asymmetric shape because the left side is formed lower than the right side. As a result, when balls simultaneously reach the third branch passage BK3 from the left and right sides, it is possible to easily avoid the balls from lining up left and right in the third branch passage BK3, and the direction in which the balls are lined up (serial direction) has a vertical component. It can be made to have. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid clogging of the balls in the third branch passage BK3, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the wing member 945 becomes inoperable due to clogging of the balls.

The insertion opening 982l is an opening for inserting the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e of the wing member 945 into the back side of the bulging portion 982 when assembling the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base member 60. be.

That is, in the assembled state of the winning opening unit 930, the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e (see FIG. 16(b)) that are inserted into the third through hole 941i of the back base 941 and protrude to the back side are the parts of the throwing unit 970. A plate-like portion 945e is disposed on the back side of the bulging portion 982, with the extending portion 945d passing through the insertion opening 982l.

The rotation permitting opening 982m is an opening that is formed to penetrate within a necessary range in order to avoid restricting the displacement of the extending portion 945d that penetrates the bulging portion 982. By forming the rotation allowance opening 982m with a minimum size (width smaller than the diameter of the game ball), it is possible to avoid throwing the game ball to the front side through the rotation allowance opening 982m. Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the displacement of the plate-shaped portion 945e due to the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20(a). FIG. 21(a) shows the wing member 945 (plate-like portion 945e) in a closed state, and FIG. 21(b) shows the wing member 945 (plate-like portion 945e) in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is evacuated from the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are exposed to the opening 985e, Flowed to 985f. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided to the third branch passage BK3 side.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the open state of the wing member 945, the plate-shaped portion 945e enters the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and flows down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. The ball is flown to the third branch passage BK3 side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 from being guided to the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the wing member 945 is configured to be able to switch the side on which the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is guided by being switched between the open state and the closed state. In other words, the wing member 945 not only acts to switch the guiding direction of the ball flowing down the area between the back base 941 and the front base 943 where the wing-like main body 945m (see FIG. 17) is arranged. , acts to switch the guiding direction of the balls flowing down the inner region of the distribution unit 980 in which the plate-shaped portion 945e is arranged.

A case will be described in which the wing member 945 opens and closes immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. The upstream branch position BK0 is set as a position immediately before the position where the falling ball is affected by the wing member 945. Immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the open state of the wing member 945, when the wing member 945 opens and closes toward the closed state, the ball is pushed into the third branch passage BK3 side by the plate-shaped portion 945e.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 opens and closes toward the open state immediately after the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 in the closed state of the wing member 945, the ball is guided to the openings 985e and 985f, or is guided to the first branch. It is guided to the passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2.

In this way, the movement direction side of the wing member 945 is not obstructed, and a space sufficient to guide the ball in the movement direction side is formed, so that the ball is sandwiched between the wing member 945 and the bulging portion 982. This makes it easier to avoid the situation where the balls become jammed.

When guided to the openings 985e and 985f, the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 and can win the lottery of special symbol 1, and can receive the benefit of the payout of the prize ball, but the first branch When guided to the passage BK1 or the second branch passage BK2, neither the drawing of the special symbol 1 nor the profit of paying out the prize balls can be obtained.

Therefore, if the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0 while the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the player may be disadvantaged by the wing member 945 opening and closing immediately thereafter. Therefore, attention to the upstream branch position BK0 and the wing member 945 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), since the wing member 945 and the wing-like portion 945e are configured in a symmetrical shape, the ball flowing down in the first passage TR1 and the ball flowing down in the second passage TR2 form the wings. It is possible to make it so that there is no difference in the ease of picking up due to the member 945. In addition, prevention of ball clogging when balls are simultaneously guided from the left and right sides is achieved by making the shape of the rolling surface 982g as the rolling surface of the third branch passage BK3 bilaterally asymmetrical as described above.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 19 and 20. The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L17 (see FIG. 20(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set lower than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small.

Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from getting out of it. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

Next, the operation pattern of the wing member 945 by driving the drive unit 960 will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 21, the relationship between the time required for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 to flow down will be explained.

After the ball that has entered the first prize opening 64 reaches the ball throwing path TR0, the distribution unit 983 is tilted and the ball is flown down to the left and right sides. This tilting motion overlaps with the motion of the seesaw member 762 in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), so the explanation will be omitted, but in this embodiment, the time required for the tilting motion is sufficiently long. In order to ensure this, the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are designed to have a large magnetic force. That is, the present embodiment is designed so that the tilting operation of the distribution section 983 (the operation from the state shown in FIG. 8(a) to the state shown in FIG. 8(b)) takes at least 0.8 seconds.

After the tilting operation of the distribution unit 963, when a ball flows from the ball throwing path TR0 to the first path TR1 side, the path is designed so that it takes 0.4 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE4. Furthermore, after the tilting operation of the sorting unit 963, when the ball flows from the ball throwing path TR0 to the second path TR2 side, the path is designed so that it takes 0.2 seconds for the ball to be detected by the detection device SE5. . That is, the vertical distance between the detection sensor SE4 and the detection sensor SE5 is set as a distance that requires 0.2 seconds at the falling speed of the ball.

A pair of left and right upstream branch positions BK0 are set as positions immediately before the falling ball receives the action of the wing member 945. It is designed to take 0.6 seconds from the time the ball flows from the ball throwing path TR0 to the first path TR1 side or the second path TR2 side until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

That is, it takes 0.2 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Furthermore, it takes 0.4 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection device SE5 until the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

If the wing member 945 is in the closed state at the timing when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0, the ball passes through the openings 985b, 985c or the openings 985e, 985f, while the wing member 945 closes at the timing when the ball reaches the upstream branch position BK0. When the member 945 is in the open state, the ball is guided to the third branch passage BK3 side and passes through the ball throwing opening 982k (see FIG. 19(a)).

According to the flow path configuration as described above, the operation pattern of the wing member 945 due to the drive of the drive unit 960 is an operation pattern that ends in a time shorter than 0.6 seconds after the detection device SE4, SE5 detects the ball. If designed in this way, even if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any interval, the normal symbols will start changing as soon as the balls are detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5. can do.

For example, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, and the previous ball flows to the first path TR1 side and is detected by the detection device SE4, the next ball enters the second winning hole 64. There is a gap of 0.8 seconds before flowing to the path TR2 side, and even if the detection device SE5 is located above the detection device SE4 by 0.2 seconds, a gap of 0.6 seconds is secured. That is, it takes 0.6 seconds after the previous ball is detected by the detection device SE4 until the next ball is detected by the detection device SE5.

For example, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, and the previous ball flows to the second passage TR2 side and is detected by the detection device SE5, the next ball enters the first winning hole 64. There is a gap of 0.8 seconds before flowing to the passage TR1 side, and since the detection device SE4 is located below the detection device SE5 by 0.2 seconds, a gap of 1.0 seconds is secured. That is, it takes 1.0 seconds after the previous ball is detected by the detection device SE5 until the next ball is detected by the detection device SE4.

In this way, when a plurality of balls enter the first winning hole 64 without leaving an interval, the balls are detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 even if the previous ball flows to the left or right. The interval is 0.6 seconds or more.

Based on this premise, the 11th to 14th operation patterns described in this embodiment are completed in 0.5 seconds after the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 (normally the fluctuation of the symbol Since it is designed to take 0.5 seconds to complete the display, even if multiple balls enter the first winning hole 64 without any interval, the detection devices SE4 and SE5 As soon as the ball is detected, the variation of the normal pattern can be started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time delay from occurring from the detection of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 until the operation of the wing member 945 is performed.

FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams showing an example of detection of passage of a ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and time-measured changes in the state of the wing member 945. Note that FIG. 22(a) shows the time measurement change in the eleventh operation pattern, FIG. 22(b) shows the time measurement change in the twelfth operation pattern, and FIG. 22(c) shows the time measurement change in the thirteenth operation pattern. The time-measured changes in the operation pattern are illustrated, and in FIG. 22(d), the time-measured change in the fourteenth operation pattern is illustrated.

In FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d), as a result of the fluctuating display (0.1 seconds) of the second symbol due to the detection of the passing of the ball by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the "○" symbol becomes the second symbol. A time-based change in the state of the wing member 945 when displayed on the 2-symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), in the eleventh operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and this open state is maintained for 0.4 seconds.

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Also, the wing member 945 is maintained in the open state even after 0.4 seconds elapse from when it is detected by the detection device SE5 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

Thereby, regardless of whether the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down in the first passage TR1 or in the second passage TR2, the ball can be guided to the third branch passage BK3 side, It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640. That is, the number of lottery tickets won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is larger for the special symbol 2 lottery than for the special symbol 1 lottery ticket.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), in the twelfth operation pattern, after the passage of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), the feather member 945 is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies in subsequent figures), and this open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. For the next 0.2 seconds, it is in a closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to subsequent figures).

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Although the wing member 945 is maintained in the open state, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state 0.4 seconds after it is detected by the detection device SE5 until reaching the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the first path TR1, the ball can be guided to the third branch path BK3 side, and the ball can be guided to the second winning port 640. However, when the ball flows down in the second passage TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch passage BK3 side and cannot be allowed to enter the second winning hole 640. , the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 20(a)).

That is, in the lottery that is won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately. The case where the ball flows down in the first path TR1 corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), in the 13th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), and then 0.2 After a second, the wing member 945 is brought into an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure; the same applies to subsequent figures), and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. Thereafter, it is brought into a closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to subsequent figures).

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Although the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the wing member 945 is maintained in the open state after 0.4 seconds from when it is detected by the detection device SE5 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, when a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the first path TR1, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch path BK3 side, and the ball enters the second winning port 640. Therefore, the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 (see FIG. 20(a)), but if the ball flows down the second passage TR2, the ball is guided to the third branch passage BK3 side. This allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 more easily.

That is, in the lottery that is won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery occur alternately. The case where the ball flows down in the second path TR1 corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), in the 14th operation pattern, after the passing of the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (0.1 seconds later), and then 0.4 Immediately before the second elapses, the wing member 945 is placed in the open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure. The same applies in subsequent figures), and immediately after that, the wing member 945 is in the closed state (also indicated as "closed" in the figures. The same applies in the figure).

As a result, when the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5, 0.2 seconds elapse from the time it is detected by the detection device SE4 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0. Also, the wing member 945 is maintained in the closed state even after 0.4 seconds elapse from when it is detected by the detection device SE5 until it reaches the upstream branch position BK0.

As a result, regardless of whether the ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down in the first path TR1 or the second path TR2, the ball cannot be guided to the third branch path BK3 side. , it is not possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. That is, the number of lottery tickets won based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is larger for the special symbol 1 lottery than for the special symbol 2 lottery ticket.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d), by changing the operation pattern of the feather member 945, the lottery won when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 is the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to switch between the drawing of the special symbol 2 and the drawing of the special symbol 2.

That is, when the wing member 945 operates in the eleventh operation pattern, it is possible to continuously obtain the special symbol 2 lottery. Further, when the feather member 945 operates in the 14th operation pattern, it is possible to continuously obtain the special symbol 1 lottery.

When the feather member 945 operates in the 12th operation pattern or the 13th operation pattern, the special lottery symbols obtained for the ball flowing down in the first path TR1 and the ball flowing down in the second path TR2 are different. , the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery are alternately obtained.

Here, if the profit obtained by the player from a jackpot drawn by drawing special symbol 1 is different from the profit obtained by the player from a jackpot drawn by drawing special symbol 2, whether the jackpot is due to the drawing drawn by special symbol 1 or not, Players are paying a lot of attention to whether or not the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine in which balls are distributed to the left and right by the distribution section 983, the lottery of special symbol 1 can be won by the ball thrown to one side of the left or right side (usually the left side) by the distribution section 983; ) was configured so that a special symbol 2 lottery could be won by a ball thrown into the ball.

Therefore, if the distributing unit 983 can confirm whether the ball will be thrown to the left or right, then even if you take your eyes off the ball, you will be able to know whether the lottery to be executed from now on is the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery. was completed. In this case, attention to the falling path of the ball on the downstream side of the distribution section 983 is reduced, resulting in a problem that the game area cannot be effectively used as a production area.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the 12th operation pattern, the special symbol 2 can be won by the ball flowing down in the first path TR1, and in the 13th operation pattern, the special symbol 2 can be won by the ball flowing down in the second path TR2. You can win 2 lottery tickets. Therefore, just by checking whether the ball is thrown to the left or right by the distribution unit 983, it is not possible to determine whether the ball can win the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery.

That is, on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, it is confirmed whether or not the ball is picked up by the plate-like portion 945e of the wing member 945, or whether the ball passes through the ball throwing hole 941k (see FIG. 18) and flows toward the second side. Unless it is confirmed whether the ball enters the winning hole 640 or not, it is impossible to know whether the ball can win the special symbol 1 lottery or the special symbol 2 lottery. This makes it possible to improve attention to the falling path of the ball on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, and it is possible to effectively utilize the gaming area as a performance area.

In addition, in each operation pattern, the relationship between the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 and the wing member 945 was mainly explained, but the wing-like main body 945m of the wing member 945 is larger than the back base 941 (see FIG. 15). Since it is disposed on the front side, if a ball flowing down the front side of the rear base 941 reaches the wing member 945 just at the timing when the wing member 945 is in the open state, that ball will be placed in the second position. Naturally, being guided to the prize winning opening 640 may occur.

23 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 16(a), and FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b) are the winning slot unit 930 and FIG. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of a ball throwing unit 970.

In FIG. 24(a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 24(b), the open state of the wing member 945 is illustrated. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 23 and 24, FIG. 22 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 23, since the rolling plate portion 941l and the ball throwing hole 941k are arranged on the front side of the ball throwing opening 982k of the distribution unit 980, the internal flow path of the distribution unit 980 connects to the third branch passage BK3. The guided ball flows down towards the front side.

This ball appears to be approaching the player's side from the player's perspective, so it may appear backwards like a ball flowing downward in the gaming area or a ball entering the first prize opening 64 or the third receiving part 944a. By flowing down, the ball is visually recognized in a falling manner that is clearly different from a ball that appears to be moving away from the player.

As a result, by having the player pay attention to the ball that appears to be approaching him/her while playing, the player can see that the ball that entered the first prize opening 64 will be released from the internal flow path of the distribution unit 980. If a situation occurs where the money slips out and flows to the second prize opening 640 side, the occurrence of this situation can be easily noticed.

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a ball enters the second winning hole 640 without the player's awareness and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed without the player's awareness.

Further, the balls flowing down on the front side of the distribution unit 980 (the front side of the back base 941) can act to block the player's line of sight. Therefore, the visibility of the ball while flowing down the internal path of the sorting unit 980 can be easily reduced, so the game ball is guided to the third branch path BK3 and appears to be approaching the player's side. can be made even more noticeable.

Note that since the ball throwing hole 941k is arranged on the back side of the front base 943, if the front base 943 is made of an opaque resin material, the ball that passes through the ball throwing hole 941k and the ball guided to the front side. visibility can be reduced.

In this case, although the ball entering the first prize opening 64 can be easily confirmed, it may be difficult to grasp that the ball is flowing down the ball throwing hole 941k to the front side. It is possible to easily cause a situation in which the entered ball enters the second winning hole 640 without the player's awareness and the special symbol 2 lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 23, a detection device SE6 capable of detecting passage of a ball is disposed on the downstream side (back side) of the second winning opening 640. The detection device SE6 is a device that detects passage of a game ball having the same configuration as the detection device SE3, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof.

The lottery that can be obtained by passing a ball through the detection device SE3 is the special symbol 1 lottery, whereas the lottery that can be acquired by passing the ball through the detection device SE6 is the special symbol 2 lottery.

The operating pattern in which the wing member 945 operates among the 11th to 14th operating patterns (see FIG. 22) is set in advance based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13). be done.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a, or b, the subsequent operation pattern of the wing member 945 is set to the eleventh operation pattern. When the jackpot type is jackpot B or C, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the 12th operation pattern. When the jackpot type is jackpot c, the subsequent operation pattern of the feather member 945 is set to the thirteenth operation pattern. During periods other than the duration of the eleventh to thirteenth operating patterns, the operating pattern of the wing member 945 is set to the fourteenth operating pattern.

As a result, for the same event that the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and is distributed to the left and right sides, it is possible to determine whether the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 can be won by the ball. It can be changed depending on which operating pattern is used. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the falling path of the ball that has entered the first winning hole 64, and it is possible to attract the player's line of sight.

In addition to the operation pattern shown in FIG. 22, the operation pattern of the wing member 945 is such that the wing member 945 is activated from the timing when a ball is detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 or the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 (see FIG. 2). A long-open operation pattern is also available in which the valve is opened for a long time (approximately 2 seconds).

When the wing member 945 is operated in a long-open operation pattern, the ball that has flown down the near side of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 15) can be easily picked up by the wing-like main body 945m (see FIG. 17). . In addition, the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 can be easily guided to the third branch path BK3 side (see FIG. 21(b)).

In this way, it is easy to create a state in which the ball picked up by the wing-like main body 945m repeatedly enters the second winning hole 640. In addition, the ball that once entered the first winning port 64 is guided to the third branch passage BK3 side by the plate-like portion 945e (see FIG. 21(b)) and finally enters the second winning port 640. Easy to configure into a ball. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game mode in which the lottery with the special symbol 1 is avoided and the lottery with the special symbol 2 is repeatedly obtained.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the ball P21 rides on the wing-shaped main body 945m on the front side of the back base 941, and the ball P21 rides on the plate-shaped part 945e on the back side of the back base 941. The ball P22 can be guided at different front and rear positions (separated positions) at the same time.

Therefore, even if the wing member 945 changes to the closed state in this state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the balls P21 and P22 collide. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a malfunction in which the ball interferes with the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 and the opening/closing operation is not completed.

Furthermore, since the number of balls P22 on the plate-shaped portion 945e can be placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, it is possible to guide them simultaneously when the wing member 945 is in the open state. You can increase the number of balls.

For example, in a game mode in which all balls are fired toward the wing member 945, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, only one ball can be placed on the wing-like body 945m of one wing member 945 at the same time, and multiple balls can be launched at the same time. It is difficult to carry it.

On the other hand, in a game mode in which some of the balls are fired toward the feather member 945 and the remaining balls are fired toward the first winning hole 64, regardless of whether or not the ball is on the feather-shaped body 945m. First, since the balls can be placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, it is easy to get into a state where the balls are placed on one side of the wing member 945 at the same time.

That is, depending on the game mode in which all the balls are fired toward the feather member 945, or the game mode in which some balls are launched toward the first prize opening 64 in addition to the feather member 945, the balls that can be placed on the feather member 945 at the same time. The number of can be changed.

The ball P22 that reaches the feather member 945 via the first prize opening 64 and the ball P21 that reaches the feather member 945 without passing through the first prize opening 64 have different flowing directions before reaching the ball. Since the falling speed of the balls differs after they arrive, the appearance of the balls differs even if they arrive at the same time.

That is, the ball P22 flows vertically downward through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and reaches the plate portion 945e of the wing member 945, while the ball P21 flows through the guide portion 941g1 (see FIG. 16(a)). ), it reaches the wing-like main body 945 m in a downstream direction having a velocity component directed from the left and right outer side to the left and right inner side.

Therefore, since the velocity component in the left-right direction is larger, the velocity of the ball P21 flowing down toward the left-right inner side after reaching the wing member 945 is faster than that of the ball P22. Therefore, even if the balls P21 and P22 reach the wing member 945 at the same time, the time during which the balls P21 and P22 overlap in front view can be shortened, so that the visibility of the balls rolling on the wing member 945 can be reduced. can be improved.

Depending on the timing when the ball P22 rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 941l, passes through the ball sending hole 941k, and flows toward the front side of the back base 941, it may collide with the ball P21 (the paths merge).

Here, the upper and lower height positions of the upper surface of the wing member 945 on the rotation base end side are arranged lower than the upper and lower positions of the lower edge of the ball sending hole 941k. As a result, a vertical position where the ball rolling on the rolling plate portion 941l jumps into the front side of the rear base 941, and a vertical position where the ball rolling on the wing-shaped main body 945m jumps into the space between the pair of wing members 945. can be shifted vertically.

Therefore, when the balls collide with each other, the vertical positions of the balls can be shifted, so that a plurality of balls can be caused to flow down in sequence by relying on their own weight. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, in the operation pattern of the long opening of the feather member 945, as can be seen from the fact that the opening duration exceeds 0.6 seconds, for example, a plurality of balls enter the first prize opening 64 without any interval. In the case of a ball, there is a waiting time for the normal symbol to start changing (the normal symbol's fluctuation may be suspended).

Therefore, unlike the case where the timing at which the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4 and SE5 and the opening/closing timing of the wing member 945 are set to correspond to the time required for the ball to flow down, as explained in FIG. It becomes difficult to make the opening and closing of the wing member 945 correspond to each other.

Therefore, it is not possible to guide all the balls to the second winning port 640 side, and some of the balls that enter the first winning port 64 have the feather member 945 in the closed state (see FIG. 21(a)). There is a possibility that the upstream branch position BK0 will be reached at the right timing.

On the other hand, in the long-open operation pattern, by setting the time during which the wing member 945 is maintained in the closed state (operation waiting time, post-operation waiting time) to a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the wing member The probability that the upstream branch position BK0 will be reached at the timing when 945 is in the closed state (see FIG. 21(a)) can be reduced as much as possible.

The balls P22 rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 945e arrive at intervals of at least 1.8 seconds due to the influence of the operation of the distribution part 983. In other words, it is configured so that a plurality of balls will not ride at the same time.

On the other hand, there is no restriction on the interval at which the balls P21 reach the wing-like main body 945m, and a plurality of balls can reach the wing-like main body 945m at the same time. Therefore, it is preferable to form the wing-like main body 945m stronger than the plate-like portion 945e.

In this regard, in this embodiment, the wing-like main body 945m is formed to be thicker than the plate-like portion 945e, so that it is more durable. Further, since the wing-like main body 945m is directly supported by the shaft member 945a, it is possible to suppress changes in posture and deflection in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the ball.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

By making the plate-like portion 945e protrude from the wing-shaped main body 945m of the wing member 945 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 to the back side, the inside of the sorting unit 980 disposed inside the base plate 60 can be viewed. It is possible to act on the game balls flowing down.

That is, the wing member 945 switches between a state in which it is easy to guide the game ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 to the second winning opening 640 side and a state in which it is prevented from flowing down to the second winning opening 640 side. In addition, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball that has entered the first winning a prize opening 64 is easily guided to the second winning a prize opening 640 side and a state in which it is prevented from flowing down to the second winning a prize opening 640 side.

Furthermore, a back base 941 functioning as a partition plate is disposed between the ball rolling on the top surface of the wing-like main body 945m and the ball rolling on the top surface of the plate-like portion 945e. , it is possible to avoid collisions between balls at arbitrary positions.

As a result, the ball rolling on the wing-shaped main body 945m collides with the ball rolling on the plate-shaped part 945e, and the ball spills from the wing member 945 (the side guided to the second prize opening 640). (spills to the other side) can be avoided.

In addition, at the position where the ball that entered the first winning port 64 is branched into the flow path on the second winning port 640 side (for example, the third branch passage BK3), the flowing direction of the ball has a front-back component. Thereby, it is possible to highlight a location closely related to the flow of the ball to the second winning hole 640.

Further, it is possible to create a case where it is possible to manage the ball so that it is not detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 from the time the ball is detected by the detection devices SE4, SE5 until the fluctuating display of the normal symbol ends. Thereby, the wing member 945 whose operation is controlled when the ball is detected can act on the ball that has passed through the detection devices SE4 and SE5 in a timely manner.

Since there is an interval of at least 0.8 seconds between the timing at which the ball is thrown into the first path TR1 and the timing at which the ball is thrown into the second path TR2, the ball enters the third branch path BK3 from the left and right at the same time. Although this is not necessary, in addition, by forming the rolling surface 982g asymmetrically, it is possible to more easily avoid ball clogging in the third branch passage BK3. This makes it possible to prevent malfunction of the wing member 945 due to ball clogging even if the confluence position of the downward flow path of the balls is close to the wing member 945.

Further, the speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the wing member 945 on the front side of the base plate 60 is different from the speed of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the wing member 945 inside the base plate 60. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a continuous state in which the balls overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to easily grasp the number of balls rolling on the upper surface of the wing member 945.

Regarding the number of balls that can be mounted on the wing member 945, while a plurality of balls can be mounted on the wing-like main body 945m at the same time, the number of balls that can be mounted on the plate-shaped portion 945e is limited to one. Thereby, the durability of the wing member 945 can be improved by configuring the wing-shaped main body 945m to be more durable than the plate-shaped portion 945e.

Moreover, by preparing a plurality of operation patterns of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to create acquisition patterns for special symbol lottery in different modes. For example, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 repeatedly, there is a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery is repeatedly acquired, a pattern in which the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery are alternately acquired, and a special It is possible to switch between a pattern in which the lottery of symbol 2 is repeatedly obtained.

In addition, in a pattern in which special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery are obtained alternately, it is possible to form a pattern in which which game ball, the right or left, corresponds to the special symbol 2 lottery is reversed. As a result, simply checking whether the ball has flowed to the left or right in the distribution section 983 is insufficient information, so it is possible to improve attention to the area downstream of the distribution section 983.

In addition, when right-handed games are recommended as a winning pattern for the special symbol lottery, if the ball accidentally enters the first winning hole 64, there is a pattern in which it is easy to win the special symbol 1 lottery, and a pattern with a high probability. It is possible to switch between a pattern in which the acquisition of the special symbol 1 lottery is avoided.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 when the ball flows down one of the routes sorted by the route configuring device 700, but the route configuring device of the third embodiment In 3700, a normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is provided that can detect the passage of a ball when the ball flows down the other path. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In the route configuring device 3700, a normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is arranged on the left route among the routes distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 760.

The normal winning opening (through gate) 3765 is arranged so that the distance in the left and right direction from the seesaw member 762 is the same as the distance in the left and right direction between the seesaw member 762 and the normal winning opening (through gate) 765.

Since the normal symbol lottery can be won not only when the game ball entering the first winning hole 64 flows to the right side but also when it flows to the left side, the frequency of operation of the electric accessory 640a can be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and 765 is suspended up to four times. In this case, there is an advantage that it is easy to operate the electric accessory 640a continuously without interrupting the hold, and it is possible to smoothly execute the right-handed game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of passages through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, 765, and 3765 is suspended up to one time. The operation pattern selected in the normal symbol lottery when the number of reserved balls is 0 and the operation pattern selected in the normal symbol lottery when the number of reserved balls is 1 are configured to be different. ing. Since a state in which the number of reserved balls is full (one) is more likely to occur than a state in which the number of reserved balls is four, differences in operation patterns frequently occur.

In the present embodiment, as an example, in a probability variable state, when the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is 0, the second operation pattern is likely to be selected, and when the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is 1, the first operation pattern is selected. The pattern is configured to be easily selected.

On this premise, when the balls enter the first prize opening 64 consecutively (see FIGS. 8 and 9), the electric accessory 640a is brought into the entering state at the timing when the third ball P3 reaches the movable plate member 641. It can be easier to maintain.

That is, the ball P1 is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 765, and the ball P2 is detected by the normal winning hole (through gate) 3765 before the reference time Td1 has elapsed since the detection. The operation pattern selected by the normal symbol lottery based on the detection of the ball P2 is likely to be the first operation pattern.

Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state even before the ball P3 reaches the moving plate member 641, both the balls P1 and P2 are moved from the state shown in FIG. The ball can be guided to the two-ball throwing section 736.

In addition, in FIG. 8(a), the case where the ball P1 flows to the right side has been explained, but even if the inclination of the seesaw member 762 is reversed and the ball P1 flows to the left side, the normal pattern by detecting the ball P2 The operation pattern selected in the lottery is likely to be the first operation pattern. Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state before the ball P2 reaches the moving plate member 641, the ball P2 can be guided to the second ball throwing section 736.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is one was explained as an example, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, similarly to the explanation in the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol may be set to four.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the first embodiment, the movable plate member 641 includes a right side guide section 643 that guides game balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, and a left side guide that guides game balls that have not entered the first winning hole 64. 645, and the guide parts 643 and 645 are partitioned, but in the route configuring device 4700 of the fourth embodiment, the game balls that did not enter the first prize opening 64 are separated from the guide parts 643 and 645. It is configured so that it can be guided to the 643 side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 26 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 26, the movable plate member 4641, which slides in the front and back direction when the state of the electric accessory 4640a is switched between the retracted state and the advanced state, is connected to the right guide section 643 and the slope of the right guide section 643. An upstream guide section 4645 is provided that extends from the left end of the right guide section 643 toward the upper left along the slope of the surface 643a.

In the upstream guide section 4645, an inclined surface 4645a on which the ball rolls is inclined downward toward the right side, and its inclination angle is the same as the inclination angle of the right guide section 643 (approximately 5 degrees from the horizontal). It is formed.

In this embodiment, openings are formed in the left and right inner walls of the bending member 740 to allow a ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 4641 to pass therethrough. That is, an opening similar to the opening 744 (see FIG. 7(a)) is formed through the left and right inner walls of the bending member 740 (the left wall of the right guide portion 643).

As a result, in addition to the path of the ball passing through the first prize opening 64, a path that rolls through the upstream guide section 4645 and reaches the right guide section 643 is prepared as an inflow path to the first ball throwing path KR1. I can do it.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the ball rolls from the upstream guide section 4645 through the right guide section 643, depending on the timing of the movement of the moving plate member 4641, the ball may be received in the recovery hole 752, or In some cases, the ball may be accepted by the two-ball throwing section 736.

That is, when the electric accessory 4640a is switched to the retracted state while the ball is placed on the first ball throwing route KR1, the ball flows down toward the recovery hole 752. On the other hand, if the electric accessory 4640a still maintains the entering state when the ball is placed on KR1, the ball passes through the right guide section 643 to the right and flows down toward the second ball throwing section 736. do. That is, the ball rolling to the right on the upper surface of the rigid plate member 4641 can be caused to flow down toward the collection hole 752 or the second ball sending section 736.

The movable plate member 4641 is inclined downward to the lower right, but when a ball fired by right-handed ball passes leftward above the bending member 740 and reaches the movable plate member 4641, the ball is tilted to the left. There is a possibility that the force causes the moving plate member 4641 to pass to the left.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the protruding edge 734b of the first ball throwing section 734 is arranged so as to protrude above the left end of the movable plate member 4641. That is, by causing the ball that is about to pass the left end of the moving plate member 4641 to collide with the protruding edge 734b, the ball can be bounced back, and the ball will roll rightward on the upper surface of the moving plate member 4641. This makes it easier to create a state where

Furthermore, as the repulsive force of the ball rebounding increases to the right, the time required for the ball to reach the right end of the moving plate member 4641 can be shortened. That is, the protruding edge 734b not only prevents the ball from falling from the left end of the moving plate member 4641, but also prevents the ball from falling from the left end of the moving plate member 4641 while the moving plate member 4641 is maintained in the advanced state. This makes it easier to reach the right end of the image.

Note that the left end portion of the movable plate member 4641 is arranged above the ball passage hole 734a. Therefore, when the electric accessory 4640a is in the approach state, if the ball advances to the left on the upper surface of the movable plate member 4641 and the movable plate member 4641 changes to the retracted state just before reaching the left end, the ball will curve into a parabolic shape. As a result, the ball will fly leftward, and although the probability is low, the ball can enter the ball passing hole 734a of the first ball throwing section 734.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 is guided to the second winning hole 640 side by the movable electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, a nail is arranged in the falling path of the ball that enters the first winning port 64 to increase the randomness of the ball flowing down, and there is a probability that the ball will move to the second winning port 640 side due to collision with the nail. You may be guided.

In each of the embodiments described above, the operation of the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 is determined by a lottery of normal symbols, but the operation is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be controlled to operate in a fixed pattern from the time the power is turned on. In this case, attention to the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 can be improved.

Further, when the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 operates constantly, the through gate 765 and the detection devices SE4 and SE5 may still be provided. For example, when the passage of the ball is detected, the third symbol display device 81, a sound device, an LED, etc. may be controlled to notify the player that the ball has passed. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily understand that it is time for the ball to flow down near the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the drawing of normal symbols can be suspended, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the normal symbol lottery is not suspended and the normal symbol lottery is not held even if the passage of a ball is detected in the normal winning hole 66 or the like while the normal symbol is changing.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the seesaw member 762 or the distribution section 983 is disposed at a branch position of the downward flow path of the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail may be placed at the branch position, or a protrusion made of a resin material may be placed at the branch position. By colliding with these and the ball, the downstream path of the ball can be branched. In this case, the balls can not only flow down alternately, but also flow down continuously to one side (timing).

In each of the above embodiments, the operation time of the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 is set to a short time of about 0.5 seconds to 3 seconds, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, with a probability of about 10% in the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is maintained in the entering state for a time longer than 3 seconds (for example, 5 seconds), or the wing member 945 is It may be set to operate in a long open operation pattern in which the open state is maintained.

When operated in the long open operation pattern, it is possible to easily guide the ball that entered the first winning hole 64 to the second winning hole 640 side by the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945. Therefore, among the balls fired while operating in the long open operation pattern (the number of balls is limited considering the firing interval, which is an upper limit of 100 balls per minute), the balls that entered the first prize opening 64 However, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is not guided to the second winning opening 640 side.

When the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945 is operating in the long open operation pattern, it is easier to win the special symbol 2 lottery by firing the ball at the electric accessory 640a or the feather member 945. This is advantageous for the player. Therefore, before the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945 starts operating in the long open operation pattern, the player is informed by means such as the third symbol display device 81, a sound device, or an LED. It may be controlled to notify in advance so that the ball is fired at 945.

The notification is changed depending on the arrangement of the electric accessory 640a or the wing member 945, but in the first embodiment, it is easier for the ball to reach the electric accessory 640 if the ball is notified to suggest hitting to the right. Therefore, it is desirable.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, there is no difference in the ease with which the ball reaches the feather member 945 whether the ball is shot left-handed or right-handed, but in the sense that the ball continues to be shot from the left, It is preferable to inform in a way that suggests. Note that for players who play right-handed games from a normal state, the notification may be made with content that causes the firing to continue.

In the first embodiment, it is possible to win the special symbol 1 lottery by detecting the passing by the sensor SE, and by detecting the ball passing through the second prize opening 640 and by the switch on the downstream side. Although the case where it is possible to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when passing is detected by the sensor SE on the left side and when a ball is detected by the switch on the downstream side of the second prize opening 640, it is possible to win the special symbol 1 lottery, and when passing is detected by the sensor SE on the right side. It may also be possible to make it possible to obtain the special symbol 2 by lottery when the lottery is performed.

In this case, when the ball is swept to the right by the seesaw member 762, the player's profit is greater if the ball passes through the first ball throwing path KR1 while the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation operation (left and right tilting operation) of the seesaw member 762 is completed in a time shorter than 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operating resistance may be increased by reducing the clearance of the rotating shaft portion, and the time required for rotating the seesaw member 762 may be set to 1.0 seconds or more. In this case, even if the first ball enters the first prize opening 64 consecutively, after the fluctuating display due to the detection of the ball in the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 ends, the next ball enters the seesaw member. 762, it is possible to configure a game in which the player is swept to the left.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide portion 742 is disposed at the left-right center position of the flow path formed inside the upper protrusion portion 741, but the guide portion 742 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide portions 742 may be configured to be arranged side by side on the left and right. In this case, the mutually protruding tip surfaces are formed to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the opposing surfaces, so that they come into contact with the two guide portions 742 and are guided (back side). It is possible to effectively suppress the ball being folded back from being misaligned in the left-right direction.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 765 and the bending member 740 are connected by a resin path, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the path for guiding the ball may be configured with nails. In this case, the falling speed of the balls can be varied.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 are formed as parallel linear grooves, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first inclined groove 755 and the second inclined groove 757 may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be formed with a curved path. In the case of curvature, the lower guide surface of the ball may be curved like a metal rail, or it may be curved in a meandering manner back and forth.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left guide part 645 is arranged on the front side of the covering plate part 711 when the movable plate member 641 is in the advanced state, and the ball can roll on the upper surface thereof. In this case, a protrusion may be provided on the front side of the covering plate portion 711 to extend in a direction intersecting the rolling path of the ball. Thereby, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the left guide portion 645 can be caused to collide with the protrusion, thereby decelerating the ball.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls swept to the right by the right guide section 643 are received by the second ball throwing section 736 without any leakage, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the right guide portion 643 may be formed to extend to a position above the second ball throwing portion 736, and the general winning hole 63 may be disposed on the right side of the second ball throwing portion 736.

In this case, if the movable plate member 641 changes to the retracted state at the timing when the ball is placed vertically above the second ball throwing section 736, the ball will be received by the second ball throwing section 736; If the movable plate member 641 is still maintained in the entering state at the timing when the ball is placed vertically above the ball 736, the ball passes through the second ball throwing section 736 to the right and is accepted into the general prize opening 63. .

That is, at the time when the ball is flown to the right side by the right guide section 643, it is not possible to determine whether the ball is guided to the second ball throwing section 736 or to the general prize opening 63, thereby improving the attention to the ball. can be done.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the jackpot type is controlled by one, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of operation patterns are preset corresponding to the jackpot type, and when a ball passes through the normal prize opening (through gate) 765 is detected, which operation pattern will be controlled is selected based on the probability. The operation of the electric accessory 640a may be performed in a different operation pattern.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the high probability state is set to the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to include a case where the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the high probability state becomes the fourth operation pattern. In this case, it can be made difficult to determine whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the first winning opening 64 flows downstream via the seesaw member 762, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the seesaw member 762 and the left flow path may be omitted. That is, the flow path may be formed only from the first prize opening 64 and the right side path.

In this case, it will be difficult to exclude cases in which multiple balls enter the ball, but for example, if there is a rotating body that rotates at a constant speed with a rotation axis in the front and back direction on the downstream path from the center frame 86 to the first winning hole 64. A rotating body is provided with a concave portion capable of accommodating a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumferential circle, and the ball accommodated in the concave portion is moved above the first prize opening 64 by rotation of the rotary body. By configuring the ball to be accepted into the first winning hole 64 only when the ball reaches the first winning hole 64, it is possible to prevent multiple balls from entering the first winning hole 64.

That is, since the rotating body can prevent the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 at any timing, the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be defined by the rotational speed of the rotating body.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the first prize opening 64 rides on the right guide section 643 and flows down to the side opposite to the left guide section 645, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the slope of the right guide part 643 is configured to be downwardly inclined toward the left guide part 645, and the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 flows from the right guide part 643 to the left guide part 645, and the first ball is thrown. It may also be configured to be guided by the section 734.

In this case, when the movable plate member 641 is maintained in the advanced state for a sufficiently long time, the ball placed on the first ball throwing path KR1 can be guided to the first ball throwing section 734, and the lottery of special symbol 2 can be performed. can be obtained.

On the other hand, if the moving plate member 641 enters for a short period of time, the ball will fall between the first ball throwing section 734 and the bending member 740, but by receiving the ball at this position, the player can A receiving port may be provided that provides a predetermined benefit.

The profit when a ball enters the receiving hole may be the payout of the prize ball, the drawing of special symbols 1 or 2, the drawing of normal symbols, or the falling lottery (from high probability state). It may be a lottery (lottery that changes the gaming state to a low probability state), or it may be any other profit. In any case, attention to the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 can be improved.

It should be noted that the plate may be extended so as to be upwardly inclined to the right side from the right end of the right side guide portion 643, so that a falling ball can be received on the right side of the bending member 740. In this case, if the configuration is such that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 from the right side of the bending member 740 reaches the first ball throwing path KR1, the state in which the ball is arranged on the first ball throwing path KR1 By operating the movable plate member 641 to be in the retracted state, the ball falls on the first ball throwing route KR1 and is detected by the sensor SE, making it possible to win the special symbol 1 lottery.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the normal winning opening (through gate) 66 is arranged on the left side of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the normal winning a prize opening (through gate) 66 arranged on the left side may be omitted. In this case, the normal winning slot (through gate) 765 is the only place where you can win a lottery with a normal symbol when you hit the left hand, and the normal winning slot (through gate) 67,765 where you can win a lottery with a normal symbol when you hit the right. be done.

That is, by firing the ball with left-handed hitting, the operation of the electric accessory 640a can be limited to the operation by drawing a normal symbol at the normal winning opening (through gate) 765, so the first operation pattern or the first operation pattern When the electric accessory 640a operates in the second operation pattern, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the electric accessory 640a is not guided by the right guide portion 643 and is detected by the sensor SE.

On the other hand, if the ball is fired right-handed, it is easier to win the lottery with normal symbols, so it is easier to increase gaming efficiency. In other words, the player can play the game in such a way that it is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is detected by the sensor SE, although the playing efficiency is reduced, or the player can play the game in such a way that the game efficiency is increased but there is a possibility that the ball will be detected by the sensor SE. You can choose to play a game that increases the amount slightly, or choose according to your preference.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable plate member 641 extends to the outside of the bending member 740, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the left guide portion 645 may be omitted. In this case, the second ball throwing section 736 may function as the second winning hole 640.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball is guided to the right guide portion 643 from the path formed by the distribution member 760, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be guided from the front side of the base plate 60 to the right guide portion 643. In this case, a plate part is extended to the left side at the same slope from the left end of the right guide part 643, and the left side surface of the bending member 740 is arranged so that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate part can enter the inside of the bending member 740. An opening may be formed in the opening.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the paths of balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable plate member 641 in different left and right directions merge on the downstream side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a detection device for detecting passage of a ball may be disposed on the lower end side of the first inclined groove 755, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be obtained when the ball is detected by the detection device. A detection device for detecting the passing of a ball may be disposed behind the second ball throwing section 736, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be obtained when the ball is detected by the detection device.

That is, by omitting the formation of the second inclined groove 757, etc., the position for detecting the ball rolling on the upper surface of the left guide part 645 and the position for detecting the ball rolling on the upper surface of the right guide part 643 can be changed. They may be provided separately.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the paths of the balls that have rolled on the upper surface of the wing member 945 at different positions in the front and back merge on the downstream side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passage hole is formed at the rear of the third branch passage BK3, a detection device is disposed on the downstream side of the hole, and the detection device detects the passage of the ball, thereby creating a special It may also be possible to obtain the symbol 2 lottery.

That is, by omitting the formation of the ball-throwing hole 941k and the ball-throwing opening 982k, etc., there is a position where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the wing-like main body 945m is detected, and a position where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 945e is detected. and may be provided separately.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-like portion 945e is connected and fixed to the wing-like main body 945m on the rotating tip side of the wing member 945, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extending portion 945d may be formed on the rotational base end side of the wing member 945, or may be formed at an intermediate position in the rotational radial direction. In particular, when formed on the rotation base end side of the extension portion 945d, the formation width of the fourth through hole 941j and the rotation permissible opening 982m can be made small, and the back base 941 and bulge caused by the hole formation can be reduced. Deterioration in the strength of the portion 982 can be minimized.

Note that when a ball rides on the plate-like portion 945e, the plate-like portion 945e may be bent and deformed starting from the extended portion 945d; In this case, an elastic force generated when the plate-shaped portion 945e elastically recovers from the bending deformation is generated in a direction that pushes the ball into the third branch passage BK3 side. Thereby, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e can be stably guided to the third branch passage BK3 side.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e are formed on both of the pair of wing members 945, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the extending portion 945d and the plate-like portion 945e may be formed only on one wing member 945.

In the second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rolling surface of the wing-like main body 945m and the rolling surface of the plate-like portion 945e are formed by the same inclined surface when the wing member 945 is in the open state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 945e may be shallower (the angle with the horizontal is smaller) than the inclination angle of the wing-like main body 945m.

In this case, the speed of the ball rolling on the wing-shaped main body 945m can be made faster than the speed of the ball rolling on the plate-like portion 945e. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the balls arranged in front and behind are maintained in an overlapping state when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, when one ball is placed on the plate-like portion 945e, the motion resistance applied from the ball to the feather member 945 is greater than when one ball is placed on the feather-like main body 945m. Thus, the operating speed of the wing member 945 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case where the wing member 945 is configured to appear and retract by sliding in the front-rear direction, the inclination angle of the wing-like main body 945m and the inclination angle of the plate-like portion 945e may be similarly made different. In this case, even if the ball rides on the plate-like part 945e and the feather-like main body 945m at the same time, depending on the operating length of the wing member 945, the ball may roll on one of the plate-like part 945e or the feather-like main body 945m. A state can be created in which the balls rolling on the other side of the plate-shaped portion 945e or the wing-shaped main body 945m fall before reaching the rolling plate portion 941l.

In the second embodiment, the extension portion 945d is extended from near the top surface of the feather body 945m in the open state of the feather member 945, so that the top surface of the feather body 945m and the top surface of the plate portion 945e are arranged in front and back. Although a case has been described in which they appear to overlap, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 945e and the upper surface of the wing-shaped main body 945m may be formed to be vertically shifted from each other. In this case, even if a ball is placed on the wing-shaped body 945m while the ball is placed on the plate-shaped portion 945e, there is a shift in the vertical position, so the ball on the front side completely hides the ball on the rear side. can be easily avoided.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-like portions 945e are formed in bilaterally symmetrical positions, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the wing-like main body 945m may be configured to have a symmetrical shape, but the plate-like portion 945e on the right side may be arranged higher than the plate-like portion 945e on the left side (arranged asymmetrically). . In this case, while maintaining the appearance of the wing-like main body 945m that is easy to see from the front, it is left-right symmetrical, while the falling path of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 945e arranged on the back side is made left-right asymmetrical. I can do it. Thereby, when the ball arrives on the line of symmetry, the loads in the left and right directions are balanced, making it easier to avoid a situation where the ball gets jammed.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the operating resistance of the distribution section 983 is designed using the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c to define the shortest distance between the balls, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, on the flow path from the center frame 86 to the first prize opening 64, there is a recessed part that is a rotary body that rotates at a constant speed about a rotation axis in the front and back direction and can accommodate a ball at a predetermined position on the outer circumference. A rotating body may also be provided. In this case, by configuring the ball accommodated in the concave portion to be received in the first winning hole 64 only when the ball reaches above the first winning hole 64 due to the rotation of the rotating body, the first winning hole can be received. It is possible to prevent consecutive balls from entering the mouth 64.

That is, since the rotating body can prevent the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 at any timing, the interval between balls entering the first winning hole 64 can be defined by the rotational speed of the rotating body.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the slope 4645a of the upstream guide section 4645 and the slope 643a of the right guide section 643 have the same slope, but this is not necessarily the case.

For example, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 4645a may be larger than the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, the acceleration of the ball rolling on the inclined surface 4645a to the right can be increased, so even if the electric accessory 4640a is in the retracted state while the ball is placed on the first ball throwing path KR1. It is also possible to create a state in which the ball also flows toward the second ball throwing section 736 due to momentum. That is, by increasing the acceleration in the right direction, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down into the recovery hole 752. In this sense, compared to the ball that entered the first winning hole 64, the ball that rolls down the slope 4645a can enter the second ball throwing section 736 more easily.

Further, for example, the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 4645a may be smaller than the angle of inclination of the inclined surface 643a. In this case, since the time the ball stays on the inclined surface 643a can be extended, the electric accessory 4640a changes to the retracted state when the ball is placed on the first ball throwing path KR1, and the ball goes into the recovery hole 755. This makes it more likely that the water will flow down to the ground.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Configuration to reduce wasted balls>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. In a gaming machine comprising a detection means and an operation means whose operation is controlled in a predetermined pattern based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, the game ball that has passed through the detection means is brought to the operation means. A game machine A1 characterized by comprising a guide means for guiding along a predetermined route.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a movable accessory that opens and closes after a predetermined period of time has passed after detecting passage of a game ball in a detection area (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-000562) . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the falling path of the game ball that has passed through the detection area flows down in multiple ways. Since the cases where the game balls are picked up by the movable accessory and the cases where they fall from the movable accessory will occur randomly, if there are many game balls that fall from the movable accessory, the player will have to adjust the game machine store to be disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem in that it is easy for players to misunderstand that they are playing games, and they may feel dissatisfied with the fact that they are not able to play games in an equal environment.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the game ball flows down after passing the detection means is not random, but the game ball is guided to the operating means by the guide means, so that the game ball that has passed the detection means The player can be made to understand that the difference between whether the prize is picked up by the operating means or spilled from the operating means is due to action control (control based on the success or failure of a lottery conducted in advance at the time of winning). In other words, it can be understood that the pattern of operation control of the operating means is set based on the flow time specified by the configuration of the guiding means, and is not based on adjustments by the gaming machine store. It can make you feel like you are playing in an environment.

Note that the gaming area refers to the area where the gaming ball flows down until the profit given to the player by the falling gaming ball is determined, and is not limited to the area on the front side of the gaming board, for example. For example, a flow path formed upstream of a detection device that draws the first symbol by detecting passage of a game ball, and a flow path provided inside a game board or on the back side of the game board. Roads are also included in the gaming area.

A gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1, wherein the guide means is disposed so as to pass through the back side of the gaming area.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the game balls guided by the guide means can be hidden by the game balls flowing down in the game area, so that attention is paid to the area from the guide means to the operating means. You can improve your strength.

A game machine A3 in the game machine A2, wherein the game ball guided by the guide means flows down within a predetermined range toward the front side of the game board constituting the game area.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, since the gaming balls guided by the guide means flow down to the front side of the gaming board, the players can visually perceive the gaming balls as if they are approaching. I can do it. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide means can be made to stand out in comparison with the normal game ball that only flows downward.

Game machine A4, characterized in that in any of game machines A1 to A3, the guide means is configured to be able to manage the time required for the game ball to flow down from the detection means to the operation means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A3, it is possible to easily set the operation control of a pattern in which a game ball is picked up by the operating means and the operation control in a pattern of dropping it. .

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the operating means is configured to guide the game ball in a rolling manner in a closed state or an open state, and the width dimension of the game ball in the downstream direction is the same as that of the game ball. A gaming machine A5 comprising a first operating part set to be twice the diameter or less, and a game ball guided by the guide means is guided to the first operating part.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the first operating section can shorten the time for the game ball to be guided to the operating means, and the operating means can guide the game ball to the operating means. can be guided one ball at a time. The width of the operating means can be shortened.

In the game machine A5, the operating means includes a second operating section that is longer than the first operating section, and the game ball moves in the second operating section longer than the period required for the gaming ball to roll through the first operating section. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the period required for rolling the parts is longer.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, as a guiding mode of the game ball that has reached the operating means, when the operating means are operating in the same operation pattern, the gaming ball is guided in the first direction. Depending on whether the ball reaches the operating section or the second operating section, it is possible to change how the game ball flows downstream.

In the gaming machine A6, a gaming ball guided to the first operating section and a gaming ball guided to the second operating section are guided to different downstream areas.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A6, the guidance direction of the ball can be configured in a plurality of directions using one operating means, so that the appearance when guiding the game ball by the operating means is improved. can be realized in multiple ways.

In the game machine A7, the game ball that has passed through the detection means is configured to be guided to the first operating section, and the game ball that has flown down without passing through the detection means is guided to the second operating section. A game machine A8 characterized by:

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A7, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed the detection means from being bounced by other game balls and causing poor guidance.

In any of the game machines A6 to A8, the game ball guided to the first operating section and the game ball guided to the second operating section are characterized in that collision on the operating means is suppressed. A gaming machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines A6 to A8, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of non-uniformity in the flow pattern due to collision of the game balls rolling on the operating means. can.

Note that a wall may be placed between the game balls placed on the first operating section and the game balls placed on the second operating section to isolate them, or even if there is no wall, they will not collide. It may also be managed in such a way that it does not flow down.

In the gaming machine A9, the gaming ball guided to the first operating section flows down in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the gaming ball guided to the second operating section.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, unlike the case where the game ball guided to the first operating section and the gaming ball guided to the second operating section flow down in the same direction, Collision between game balls can be avoided regardless of the falling speed of the game balls.

Note that the downward direction of the game ball may be reversed left and right, or reversed front and back. Alternatively, the direction may be in the opposite direction along a predetermined locus (for example, a circular locus).

A gaming machine A11 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, wherein the guide means includes a plurality of routes as the predetermined route.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A10, it is possible to increase the number of falling patterns of game balls while reducing the number of types of operation patterns of the operation means.

<Sensor is placed on the path of 8 chances and pulls the ball from the disadvantageous side to the advantageous side>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area configuring means that forms a gaming area in which the game balls fired by the game ball launching device flow down, a configuring device that configures a falling path for the game balls, and the configuration thereof. A first path, which is arranged downstream of the means, in which the game ball is guided to the first ball entry port, and a second path, which is arranged in the downstream side of the constituent means, in which the game ball is guided to the second ball entry port. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a moving means for moving a game ball flowing down the first route toward the second route.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the route that the gaming balls take periodically changes depending on the order in which the gaming balls pass through the ball entrance (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the advantages and disadvantages of the ball entering the ball opening only change depending on the period in which the game ball enters the ball. There was a problem in that it was difficult to form. In other words, there was a problem in that the range of change in the player's advantage degree was limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the moving means determines whether the game ball that has flown down the path configured by the component means enters the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. Since it can be caused to occur randomly, the range of change in the degree of advantage for the player can be expanded compared to a case where the ball entrance into which the game ball enters changes periodically.

In gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the route configured by the configuration means is a branch route.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, not only the movement of the game ball changes due to the action of the moving means, but also the flowing pattern of the game ball changes due to the branching of the path. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball that has entered the component means.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a detection means configured to be able to detect passage of a game ball flowing down the route, and the moving means is operable in a manner that affects the flow of the game ball within the route. The operating means is configured such that in the first state, the game ball is thrown toward the first ball entry port, and in the second state, the game ball is thrown toward the second ball entry port. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is configured so that the ball is thrown, and that the operation can be controlled based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, depending on the operation pattern of the operating means, the game ball that enters the constituent means either enters the first ball entrance or enters the second ball entrance. Since it is possible to switch whether the ball enters the mouth or not, it is possible to easily reduce the periodicity of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters. This makes it possible to widen the range of change in the player's advantage compared to the case where the ball entrance into which the game ball enters changes periodically.

In the gaming machine B3, the operating means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down the outside of the constituent means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, there is a means for guiding the game ball flowing down the flow path configured in the component means, and a means for guiding the game ball flowing down outside the flow path configured in the component means. The operating means can serve as both the guiding means and the guiding means.

The gaming machine B3 or B4 is provided with a second detection means disposed outside the path of the component means, and includes a mode of guiding a game ball that has passed through the detection means to the operating means, and a second detection means. A game machine B5 characterized in that the manner in which the passing game ball is guided to the operating means is different.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of guidance modes for the operating means.

Note that the difference in the guidance mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a difference in the path of the game ball, or a difference in the falling speed of the game ball.

In any of the game machines B3 to B5, the operating means changes the downward direction of the game ball between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction by switching between the first state and the second state. Machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the change in the downward direction of the game ball.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B6, the detection means is controlled so that a predetermined symbol changes for a predetermined period based on the passing of the game ball, and during the predetermined period, the game ball enters the path. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the period is set to be shorter than the period required for passing through the detection means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, by maintaining the state in which the number of gaming balls arranged between the entrance of the path of the component means and the detection means is one or less, , it is possible to avoid a situation where the symbols are changing at the time the game ball passes through the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to start changing the predetermined symbols immediately after the game ball passes through the detection means.

Therefore, the timing at which the game ball passes through the detection means can be matched with the timing at which the operation control of the operation means based on the game ball passing through the detection means is started.

In the gaming machine B7, the operating means has two control modes: a first control mode in which the game ball detected by the detection device is not guided, and a second control mode in which the game ball detected by the detection device is guided. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is switchable.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B7, even if the operation of the operating means is executed, there are cases where the game ball is guided by the operating means and cases where it is not guided due to the difference in control mode. Since it can be configured, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operation means.

In the gaming machine B8, switching of the control mode is configured to be executable each time detection is made by the detection means, and the type of the control mode that can be switched is configured to be changeable each time a jackpot game is played. Characteristic game machine B9.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B9, the player receives a profit when the game ball enters the first ball entry port, and a player receives a profit when the game ball enters the second ball entry port. A gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the profits obtained are different from the profits obtained.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B9, it is possible to improve attention to the operating means.

<Configuration that flows down to the operating means at multiple positions>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. In a gaming machine comprising a detection means and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means, the operation means has a first downstream position where the game ball can flow down. , and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, such that the downstream manner of the game ball flowing down the first downstream position is different from the downstream manner of the game ball flowing down the second downstream position. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being configured.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a movable accessory is released based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, and the game ball is guided to the winning hole by the movable accessory (for example, a special game machine). (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the manner in which the game ball is guided by the movable accessory is monotonous, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the attention of the movable accessory.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the operating means is provided with a plurality of downstream positions for causing the game ball to flow down, and the downstream mode is configured to differ depending on which downstream position the game ball flows down. Variations can be provided in the manner in which the game ball is guided by the movable accessory, and the attention of the movable accessory can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the flow mode is a flow speed, a flow direction, or a flow interval of the game ball.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C1, it is possible to vary the flow of the game balls flowing down along the operating means, and it is possible to improve the attention to the game balls.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the first downstream position is set as a position where the gaming ball that has passed the detection means can flow down.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, by confirming that the gaming ball has reached the first downstream position, it is possible to know that the gaming ball has passed the detection means. , it is possible to eliminate the need to visually recognize the detection means.

In addition, by making the game balls that have passed through the detection means and the game balls that have not passed through the detection means flow down at different positions on the operating means, the number of game balls that can be placed on the operating means at the same time can be increased. This can be changed depending on whether the firing mode is aimed so that all the balls pass through the detection means, or the firing mode is aimed so that some of the game balls miss the detection means.

In the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the downstream path of the gaming ball that has passed through the detection means is configured as a non-branching path.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, by confirming that the gaming ball has reached the first downstream position, it is possible to understand that the gaming ball has passed the detection means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the downstream path of the game ball that has flown down the first downstream position and the downstream path of the game ball that has flown down the second downstream position are defined by a predetermined path on the downstream side of the operating means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by merging at a merging position.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C4, the profit obtained by the game ball caused by the game ball flown down by the operating means can be made the same regardless of the position of the game ball. .

In the gaming machine C5, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the merging position is located at a position away from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C5, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load generated by the gaming balls at the time of merging on the operation of the operating means. Thereby, the operation of the operating means can be executed smoothly.

In the gaming machine C5, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the merging position is located close to the operating means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C5, the detection device that detects the passage of the game ball flowing down along the operating means can be placed further upstream, so that profits can be generated early. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the waiting time from when the game ball flows down along the operating means to when a profit is generated.

A game machine C8, which is any one of the game machines C5 to C7, and is configured such that the game balls fall downward at the merging position.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, it is possible to avoid situations such as balls flowing backward after merging or balls clogging.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a game characterized in that the game balls flowing down the first downstream position and the game balls flowing down the second downstream position are configured to have the same flowing direction. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C8, it is possible to unify the side that focuses on the game balls that have reached the operating means, so that it is easy for the player to focus on the points to be focused on. You can make them understand.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, a game characterized in that the game balls flowing down the first downstream position and the game balls flowing down the second downstream position are configured to flow in different directions. Machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, by visually confirming the direction in which the gaming ball flows down, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball has flown down the first downstream position or whether the gaming ball has flown down the second downstream position. Since it is possible to judge whether or not the downstream position has flown down, the downstream direction of the game ball can be grasped on the downstream side of the operating means even in a configuration where the game balls placed close to the operating means overlap in front and behind and are difficult to see. I can do it.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, a first ball entrance is configured to be able to provide a first profit to a player when a game ball enters, and a first ball entrance that is configured to provide a first profit to a player when a game ball enters the game machine. a second ball entry port configured to be capable of imparting a second profit larger than the first profit, the first downstream position being a falling path of a game ball that has entered the first ball entry port; A gaming machine C11, wherein the operating means is configured to be able to guide a game ball flowing down the first downstream position toward the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the operating means causes the gaming ball that enters the first ball entrance to be turned into the first ball before a profit is awarded. 2. Can be pulled out to the ball entrance side.

As a result, for example, a gaming machine with a horizontally symmetrical board (the winning slots for special symbol drawings and the winning slots that open and close during special games are arranged vertically in the center of the left and right, and you can hit the winning slots with your left hand or right hand). Even if the game machine has a board structure that allows the player to enter the ball by hitting the ball, the frequency with which profits are generated by entering the ball into the first ball entry port can be reduced by operating the operating means.

Therefore, in order to reduce the frequency of balls entering the first ball entrance, it is possible to reduce the need to configure a right-handed hitting path in which the game ball is not guided to the first ball entrance, improving the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area. can be done.

<Advantages and disadvantages of the first flow path and the second flow path that are branched by the branching means can be changed>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area forming means that forms a gaming area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow, and a first channel and a first flow path downstream of a predetermined ball entry area. configuring means for configuring a second flow path, a first profit obtained by the player when a game ball flows down the first flow path, and a first profit obtained by the player when the game ball flows down the second flow path. A gaming machine D1 is provided with a changing means configured to be able to change the magnitude relationship between the second profit obtained by the player and the second profit obtained by the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a difference in the profit that a player is expected to gain depending on whether a game ball that has flown down a predetermined ball entry area flows down to the left side or to the right side. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144741). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the advantageous direction when the game ball falls is fixed, so if you can confirm the direction of the game ball flowing down at the branching position, you can predict the profit that will be obtained after that, and it is difficult to actually Since the player's concentration peaks before the game ball reaches the fixed area where the profit is fixed, the player's attention to the route from the branch position to the fixed area decreases, making it difficult to direct the gaming area. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the perspective of using it as an area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the magnitude relationship between the first profit and the second profit can be switched by the changing means, so that the game ball can reach the peak of the player's concentration. Since the game ball can be brought to the determined area where the profit is actually determined, rather than at the time when the ball enters the first channel or the second channel, it is possible to bring the ball to the determined area where the profit is actually determined, Able to maintain high attention. Thereby, the game area can be effectively used as a performance area.

Note that the time point at which profits are determined is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be the time when the game ball passes the detection port (detection area, specific area, etc.), or the time when the player is notified of the profit determined by the game ball passing the detection port (the time when the player (when profits can be recognized).

The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it includes a downstream region that causes the game ball to flow down toward the front side when the larger of the first benefit or the second benefit is awarded to the player. Game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, a larger profit is given to the player when the game ball differs from the normal falling pattern (flowing downward), so that the game By making the ball visible, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that a larger profit has been awarded.

A gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the first flow path and the second flow path are configured to be able to merge, and there is a vertical positional difference in the approach position to the merged position.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, even if the game balls enter the merging position from the first flow path and the second flow path at the same time, the load at the time of collision is lower and lower. Since this occurs in the direction (direction that intersects the first flow path and the second flow path), it is possible to easily avoid the game balls from flowing backward.

In the gaming machine D3, a gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in the entry position, the side where the game ball passes more frequently is disposed on the lower side.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, it is possible to easily prevent game balls that frequently pass through a predetermined entry position from accidentally entering other entry positions.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the first flow path and the second flow path include a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball, and a detection means based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means. an operating means whose operation is controlled in a predetermined pattern, an interval between the detecting means and the operating means in the first flow path, and an interval between the detecting means and the operating means in the second flow path, A gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is configured such that the numbers are different from each other.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation control of the operating means is the same, but the game ball flows down the first flow path, and the second flow path is used for the game. Whether or not the operating means acts on the game ball can be made different depending on whether the ball is flowing down or not.

<Switch in 3 states>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow down, and a configuration that allows the game balls that have flown down the game area to enter. a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance; a detection means arranged in the gaming area for detecting passage of a game ball; and an operation based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means; A gaming machine comprising: a first state in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry port; and a first state in which the game ball enters the second ball entry port, depending on the operating mode of the operating device. A game machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to switch between a second state in which the game ball is easy to hit and a third state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a first starting port and a second starting port (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a state in which the ball easily enters the first starting port and the second starting port (first and second starting port), and only the second starting port (second second starting port). The problem is that although it is possible to switch between the states where it is easy for the ball to enter and the state where it is easy to enter the ball, it is not possible to switch to the state where it is easy for the ball to enter only the first starting port, which limits the degree of freedom in how the ball enters the game ball. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, there is a third state in which the ball easily enters the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port, and a third state in which the ball enters the second ball entry port, depending on the operating mode of the operating means. Since the state can be switched not only to the second state where it is easy to enter the ball, but also to the first state where it is easy to enter the first ball entry hole, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the manner in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance.

In the gaming machine E1, in the third state, the falling game ball alternately enters the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port. Machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, it is possible to equalize the number of balls entering the first ball entry port and the number of balls entering the second ball entry port in the third state.

A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine E1 or E2 is provided with a predetermined flow path formed so that a game ball flowing down can enter the first ball entry port or the second ball entry port.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E1 or E2, at the time when the game ball is flowing down the predetermined flow path, the possibility that the game ball will enter the first ball entrance port is also lower than the first ball. Since there is still a possibility that the ball will enter the second ball entrance, attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined channel can be improved.

<You can accumulate both special 1 and special 2 with support>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls, a game area forming means that forms a game area into which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow down, and a configuration that allows the game balls that have flown down the game area to enter. a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance; a detection means arranged in the gaming area for detecting passage of a game ball; and an operation based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means; A gaming machine comprising a controlled operating means, wherein the operating means follows a flowing path of the game ball that has flowed down to the position where the operating means is disposed, and a first path toward the first ball entry port; A gaming machine F1 that is configured to be able to branch into a second route toward the second ball entrance side and another route.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a first starting port and a second starting port (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-144741). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is possible to create a state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port (second starting port) when the movable piece is in the open state, but the ball enters the first starting port. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to create a state in which the ball was easily played, and there was room for improvement in the manner in which the game ball was guided by the movable piece.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first path and the second path are formed as downstream paths from the operating means, so that it is possible to guide the game ball to the first ball entrance. Since the game ball can also be guided to the second ball entrance, the manner in which the game ball is guided by the operating means can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the profit that can be awarded to the player when a game ball enters the second ball entrance is greater than the profit that can be given to the player when the game ball enters the first ball entrance. A large profit is set, and the first ball entry port is arranged below the center side of the operating means, and the second ball entry port is arranged below the end side of the operating means. Game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F1, once the game ball has flown to the end side of the operating means, it can enter the second ball entrance, so that the ball will fall in the middle position (timely operation). By operating the means), it is possible to make it easier for a game ball to enter the second ball entry port than a situation in which the ball enters the first ball entry port.

A gaming machine F3, which is the gaming machine F1 or F2, and includes a spill prevention means for preventing game balls from spilling from the end of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the spill prevention means can prevent the game ball from spilling from the operating means due to excessive force, so that when the gaming ball reaches the operating means, The player's sense of security can be increased.

Furthermore, by allowing the game ball to bounce back with high repulsion using the spill prevention means, it is possible to increase the rolling speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the operating means and to make it easier for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the operating means in a short time. can.

<Different configurations for left and right distribution>
A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. a plurality of detection means, an operating means that operates based on the detection of passing of a game ball by the detection means, and a guided ball entrance configured to allow the game ball guided by the operating means to enter. In the gaming machine, the plurality of detection means include a first detection means disposed upstream of the operating means, and a second detection means disposed at a different position from the first detection means. A gaming machine G1 comprising:

BACKGROUND ART Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a normal figure starting opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-54970). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the route guided to the normal figure starting port and the route guided to the opening/closing member side are separate routes, and the game balls flow down the respective routes alternately. If a game ball collides with the nail placed directly above the starting hole of a regular game ball and deviates from the starting hole of the regular game game, there will be a period of time before the game ball is guided to the starting hole of the regular game ball next time. Therefore, when the opening/closing member is closed, the game balls tend to flow down to the opening/closing member side, which tends to lead to a situation where expectations are low. In this case, there is a problem in that the game may be delayed, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, the gaming machine G1 includes a first detection means disposed upstream of the operating means and a second detection means disposed at a position different from the upstream side of the operating means. , it is possible to frequently cause a situation in which the game ball is detected by the detection means. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of operation of the operating means, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine G2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1, a predetermined flow path is formed between the first detection means and the operating means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to rectify the flow of gaming balls from the first detection means to the operating means.

A gaming machine G3 in the gaming machine G1 or G2, wherein the operating means is formed so as to extend toward the downstream path of the game ball passing through the second detection means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1 or G2, it is possible to prevent the attentional power on the second detection means side from becoming too low in comparison with the attentional power on the first detection means side.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D5, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine Z3 characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a movable accessory is released based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, and the game ball is guided to the winning hole by the movable accessory (for example, patented Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-181572).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the attention of the movable accessory. The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the attention of movable accessories.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the game machine of technical idea 1 includes a game ball firing device that fires game balls, and a game area configuration means that forms a game area in which the game balls shot by the game ball firing device flow down. A gaming machine comprising: a detection means disposed in the gaming area for detecting the passage of a game ball; and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the detection means. The operating means includes a first downstream position where the game ball can flow down, and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, and the operating means has a flow mode in which the game ball flows down the first downstream position. The game ball is configured to flow down the second downstream position in a manner different from that of the game ball.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the falling aspect is the falling speed, the flowing direction, or the falling interval of the game ball.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the first downstream position is set as a position where the game ball that has passed through the detection means can flow down.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to improve the attention of the movable accessory.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, it is possible to improve attention to the game ball.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to eliminate the need to visually recognize the detection means.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base board (part of the gaming area configuration means)
67 Normal prize opening (detection means, second detection means)
112a Ball launching unit (game ball launching device)
640 2nd prize opening (2nd ball entrance)
640a Electric accessory (operation means)
643 Right side guide section (first operating section, first downstream position)
645 Left side guide section (second operating section, second downstream position)
700 Route configuration device (part of gaming area configuration means)
734 First ball throwing part (spill prevention means)
736a Ball passage hole (guided ball entrance)
740 Bending member (part of guide means)
750 Intervening member (part of guide means)
760 Sorting member (part of guiding means)
765 Normal winning opening (detection means, first detection means)
930 Winning opening unit (part of gaming area configuration means)
945 Wing member (moving means, operating means)
945e Plate-shaped part (part of operating means, first downstream position)
945m Feathered body (part of the operating means, second downstream position)
980 Sorting unit (part of the gaming area configuration means, part of the configuration means)
3765 Normal winning opening (detection means, second detection means)
BK3 3rd branch passage (part of 2nd route)
SE3 Detection device (first ball entrance)
SE4, SE5 Detection device (detection means)
SE6 Detection device (second ball entrance)
TR1 1st passage (part of 1st route)
TR2 2nd passage (part of the 1st route)

Claims (3)

A game ball firing device that fires game balls; a game area configuring means that forms a game area in which the game balls fired by the game ball firing device flow; and a game area forming device that is disposed in the game area and detects passage of the game ball. A gaming machine comprising a detection means and an operation means whose operation is controlled based on the detection of passage of a game ball by the detection means,
The operating means includes a first downstream position where the game ball can flow down, and a second downstream position different from the first downstream position, and is configured to control the downstream mode of the game ball flowing down the first downstream position and the second downstream position. A game machine characterized in that a game ball flowing down a second downstream position is configured to have a different manner of flow. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the flow rate is a flow speed, a flow direction, or a flow interval of the game ball. 3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first downstream position is set as a position where a game ball that has passed through the detection means can flow downward.

Images